JP6836276B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention includes an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Regarding game machines that can generate.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of changing a setting (probability setting value) related to a gaming condition (for example, Patent Document 1).

The winning probability of a big hit (and a small hit) is associated with the probability setting value.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by performing the setting suggestion effect regarding the probability setting value.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-238056

However, during a production that the player will see many times, for example, a reach production with low expectation of a big hit, the player does not concentrate on the game (such as looking around or checking the mobile phone etc.). However, there is a problem that even if a setting suggestion effect is performed during the effect, it is overlooked.

An object of the present invention is to concentrate a player on a game in a game machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a player is provided with an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a player. In a game machine capable of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the game, the effect control means includes a plurality of elements in a predetermined period, and the setting is provided. The setting value can be changed according to the setting related to the game. The setting suggestion effect suggesting information about the value can be executed a plurality of times, and during the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the first element of the setting suggestion effect suggests the information about the set value and suggests the setting. The second element of the effect is characterized in that it is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game being executed will be a special result.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the player can concentrate on the game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the performance display device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination processing. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game processing. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a table exemplifying the distribution of the type of jackpot. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of information setting processing. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of information setting processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a variation pattern setting process. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command processing. It is a time chart of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. This is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of another setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining another example of another setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a table which shows the correspondence relationship between the work setting value of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment, the display probability setting value (setting example 1, 2, 3, 4), and the effect control information. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 3 or the setting example 4 of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 3rd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 4th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 5th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the setting change state which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. This is another example of the front view of the game board when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like in the special gaming state of a normal operation which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and a memory abnormality occurs by power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration and shifts to the setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration and shifts to the setting change state. A timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal by power recovery, the setting is changed, and then the power is turned off. Is.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the game machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[Overall view of the game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The game machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the gaming state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the game machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the game machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability change state, a probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (special game state). ), Small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is a game that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs, instead of determining whether or not to generate a probabilistic state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes having different launching forces. Can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and a right-handed hit in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs the variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 has an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is placed in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win a prize.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (starting port 1, first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, which is provided with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing. (Public train) is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides so as to retract from the front to the back side to convert the game ball into a state in which it can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the starting winning opening 36 is likely to win a game ball when hitting left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is easy to win a game ball when hitting right.

The movable member 37b is a slide opening / closing type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37 (a winning state that is advantageous for the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (normal power support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probabilistic state (excluding the latent probabilistic state), the time saving state (normal power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the start winning opening 36, the lower winning opening is opened by retracting from the front to the back by the lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening / closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the lower prize opening, a lower prize opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 can easily win a game ball when hitting right.

The game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37 has an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper winning opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of tilting to the right by the upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variable winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the large winning opening, an upper large winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 can easily win a game ball when hitting right. Further, the lower prize opening switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the grand prize opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass through only in the case of a probability variation jackpot. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the game shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot ends. In addition to confirming that the operation is to be performed, information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that a V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) wins the winning opening. A number of prize balls corresponding to the types of the above are discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like. Further, in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38, 39 and their vicinity, LEDs capable of emitting light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described later). A part of 46) is arranged.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), variable display unit 53 for normal figure variable display game (normal figure display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variable display game. It has a storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56) for notifying the number of stored figures. Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is provided with a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (when it should be hit normally). D7), the second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is high. Third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that displays the status, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (number of times of opening and closing of special variable winning devices 38 and 39) A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) for displaying the above is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when variable display is executed. In addition, all the LEDs provided as indicators turn on and off all (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), circular lighting (turns on and off in a predetermined order from any one LED at predetermined time intervals), or a plurality of LEDs. It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal diagram display 53, the variation display game is executed by the variation display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special figure variation display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 hold LED 1, special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) according to the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED 1, special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) depending on the combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of holds when the display device 41 is not in the state of a big hit (including the case where the display device 41 has a reach described later). Do.

Next, the flow of the game in the game machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the game machine 10, a game is performed by launching a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball launcher (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning opening will be used as a payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure change display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the solenoid solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode.

In the present embodiment, the game machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variable machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be put into an execution state at the same time (both) independently of each other. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in this embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. To do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result.

If a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed. After the small hit operation related to the game is completed, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted.

Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). During this period, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game will be forcibly removed and stopped.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. Further, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be simultaneously executed (executed state).

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a jackpot state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 change the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3). Will be converted. That is, the large winning openings provided in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

When the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. The value (number of balls acquired) is small. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be called the second special gaming state.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a). , 39a) is provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). A data bus 140 that connects a CPU unit 110 having a 111 (referred to as), an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120, and an output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the voltage of DC32V. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the operator's rotation operation or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (effects, etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value changing switch, or may provide a dedicated setting value changing switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1), the probability setting value 2 (setting 2), the probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and the probability setting value 4 (setting). 4), there are a probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → Setting value 5 (Setting 6, probability setting value 6) → Setting value 0 (Setting 1) → Setting value 1 (Setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. It may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work set value and the probability set value are set to the same value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination value of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information on the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived and displayed at a stage where the display results have not yet been derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (the degree of expectation is different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree of jackpot (expected value) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. With a random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) The clock generator is provided to generate a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. Switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37 (ordinary variable winning device), winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38, 39 (lower big winning) It is connected to the mouth switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a), and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for conversion is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 includes a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from the vibration sensor 65 that detects the vibration of the game machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 that takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) to open the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and provides information about the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the general electric current solenoid 37c and the winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive). Circuit) 138a, batch display device output from the second driver 138b, fourth output port 136 that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and the fourth that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driving driver 150 is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (four) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning balls), and the number of games that have passed through the out opening 30b. It is the total with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings) are included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls ÷ number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. The bonus ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big prize opening ratio) to the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total prize ratio) commonly used )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the game machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. The board decoration device 46 may include the above-mentioned lamp display device 80.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111b. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol in a variable time for a predetermined time on the normal map display, the normal map variation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is memorized based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. ..

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since the game is controlled so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the game is in the normal power support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the normal electric support (electric support) is executed by overlapping the time saving state.

For example, in the time-reduced state, it is possible to shorten the time so that the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game is set to the second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example). 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening number (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to one hit result of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed in the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 and FIG. 8 in FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. FIG. 6B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear). The process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply recovered.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (milliseconds) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the player waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time has expired, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c) (A1015). Here, the flag of the assumption of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM error flag indicating a RAM error is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the variable setting state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it is done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in step A1031-A1037 (during the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation mode), in step A1041-144 The RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) or the process at the time of normal power-on (power restoration) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”). An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. Is output to (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. While the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, if the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is not executed, but the probability setting changing flag is set, there is an abnormality. , A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) that there is an abnormality in the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), The on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As described above, even when the information about the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the processing during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability The probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later, but remain when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the process at the time of the power failure in steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure does not occur, the probability setting value can be confirmed in the variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1038), and issues a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and the unused area, and a configuration that does not clear the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball output rate, the base value (the ball output rate in the normal game state), the accessory ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 has a normal power supply because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”). The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure recovery process is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Move to the processing of.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Is done. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 or the like. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command for both Special Figures 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuating nor hitting), and is a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of the hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win initial value random number) , The initial value of the fall lottery random number used in the fall lottery (fall lottery initial value random number), etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A1049). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing.

In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if it is not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), the game control device 100 uses the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) and the like based on the output data set in various processes. Output processing for performing actuator drive control and the like is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308) and random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors. (A1310), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes after step A1317 are executed.

The game control device 100 performs a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”). Execute (A1312). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1316), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 have a large winning opening switch 43 (lower winning opening switch 38a, upper winning opening switch 39a), a specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and a remaining ball ejection port. Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and the performance display device 152 Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability set value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability set value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. Whether or not it is determined (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 when it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is “N”) (A2409). When there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

When the game control device 100 receives an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. Along with updating by +1 the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 according to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (in RAM111c or a register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during the setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the work setting The value corresponding to the working setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, effect control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area) It is possible to prevent the situation where the value) is changed by an unintended value.

[Display example on performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, but each digit of the performance display device 152 is an 8-segment a, b, c, d, e, It consists of f, g and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, the digit 1 to the digit 3 are lit with "SET" to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in the digit 0, the display probability setting value is changed to, for example, "1" to "6" corresponding to the work setting value 0 to 5 which is switched every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated while the probability setting is changed. It switches and lights up.

In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (the result of A2401 is “N”), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0. Turns off. In the digits 1 to 3, the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not turned off.

In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is "Y"), or when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed). In (the result of A1023 is "Y"), the 7-segment display data error display "E1" when the game is stopped is lit and displayed in digits 1 and 2 (A1024).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table (A2701) for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1), and acquires a hard random number as a jackpot random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, if there is no starting opening prize (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

In the game control device 100, when there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and there is no time reduction (Public support). It is determined whether or not it is in the state of none), that is, whether or not it is in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (in the normal gaming state) (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (during the normal game state). Then, in the case of a low probability state and a state without time reduction (the result of A2704 is “Y”), that is, in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

When the game control device 100 is in a state where the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is not a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) or when there is a time reduction (a state where there is a general electric support) (the result of A2704 is "N"). A right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed as a warning when the first start-up winning opening 36 receives a starting opening winning in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed on. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2707) for setting the information of holding by winning the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and executes the special figure start opening switch common process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 2 winning monitoring table (A2709) for monitoring the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and sets a hard random number as a jackpot random number. The hard random number acquisition process to be acquired is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no start port winning (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is operating (during normal electric operation) when there is a start opening winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2711 is "Y"). Judgment (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not operating (the result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not fraud (Public electric fraud) against the normal variable winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable prize-winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that a general electric fraud is occurring. When fraud is occurring in the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not fraudulent with the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a table for setting the information of holding by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). Prepare (A2714), execute the special figure start port switch common process (A2715), and end the start port switch monitoring process.

When the game control device 100 is fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not execute the process of step A2713, but executes the processes of steps A2714 and A2715.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a fall lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high probability state to a low probability state of the jackpot probability of the special figure (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number in the fall lottery random number. Save to the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) has been won (A2914). If the prize is not given to the normal variable winning apparatus 37 (the result of A2914 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, when the start winning opening 36 is won (the result of A2914 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2915), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2916). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2918). Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as the effect command (A2919), and the effect command setting process (A2920) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process. The decorative special figure hold number command is a decorative special figure 1 hold number command at the start port 1 switch 36a, and is a decorative special figure 2 hold number command at the start port 2 switch 37a.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2918) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process will be described. 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure reservation information determination process (pre-reading process, pre-determination process). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 start memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a big hit (during a special game state) (A3001). When the big hit is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. When the jackpot is not hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the player has won the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3002). When the starting port 1 is won (the result of A3002 is "Y"), that is, when the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1) is won, the look-ahead process (pre-judgment process) is executed. Therefore, the process proceeds to the process after step A3004.

If the game control device 100 does not win the starting port 1 (the result of A3002 is "N"), is the probability of occurrence of a big hit a low probability state and a state without time reduction (a state without general electric support)? It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal gaming state) (A3003). When the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. That is, in the case of winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) in the normal game state, the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated without executing the pre-reading process (pre-determination process). In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game often fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation) and is forcibly terminated due to an outlier result. Do not execute.

The game control device 100 is a normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) when the special figure is low probability & no time reduction (the result of A3003 is "N"), that is, in a state other than the normal game state (time reduction state or probability change state). ), In order to execute the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process), the process proceeds to step A3004 and subsequent steps.

Then, the game control device 100 starts a look-ahead process (pre-determination process), and determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3004). .. When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3004 is "Y"), it is determined whether the fall lottery random number prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of the fall winning (A3005), and the look-ahead fall lottery corresponding to the judgment result is determined. An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and an effect command setting process is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a low probability state (A3008). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3004 is "N"), there is no fall from the high probability state to the low probability state in the first place, so the pre-reading process for the fall is not executed in (A3005-A3007), and the step is performed. The process proceeds to A3008.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later based on the jackpot random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and determines whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3010). ). When the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3011). , The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (the result of A3010 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). (A3013). When the starting port 2 is won (the result of A3013 is "Y"), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the starting port 2, so a look-ahead regarding the small hit is possible. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3014), and the determination result of the small hit determination process is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit (A3015). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (). A3017), the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the start port 2 (the result of A3013 is "N"), since a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3018). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the judgment result is not a small hit (the result of A3015 is "N") when the starting port 2 is won, that is, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3018). After that, the process proceeds to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017, and A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) for low probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3021).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a high-probability state (A3022), and executes the process of A3023-A3032 in the same manner as A3009-A3018. First, the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later is executed (A3023), and the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (A3024). When the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). , The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (the result of A3024 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). (A3027). When the starting port 2 is won (the result of A3027 is "Y"), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the starting port 2, so a look-ahead regarding the small hit is possible. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3028), and the determination result of the small hit determination process is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit (A3029). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3031), the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is "N"), since a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3032). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the judgment result is not a small hit (the result of A3029 is "N") when the starting port 2 is won, that is, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3032). After that, the process proceeds to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3033). When the special symbol has a high probability (the result of A3033 is "Y"), the stop symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034), and the process proceeds to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. When the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3033 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3035 without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-reading stop symbol command (high probability) for high probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3035), and executes the effect command setting process (A3035). A3036).

Subsequently, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, is executed (A3037), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed as a look-ahead. (A3038). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), the effect command setting process is executed (A3040), and the special figure hold information determination process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 receives both the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) (Low probability) is used to execute look-ahead symbol command processing (Fig. 51), and if the jackpot probability when received is in a high probability state, the look-ahead symbol command (high probability) is used to perform look-ahead symbol command processing. (FIG. 51) may be executed.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (A3009, A3023) in the special figure reservation information determination process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3101), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A3107), and performs the look-ahead jackpot determination process. finish.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (A3103). Then, when the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the judgment flag is not the high probability judgment flag (when it is the low probability judgment flag) (the result of A3103 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3105). ).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3106). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3108). When the judgment result is set, the look-ahead jackpot judgment process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not the player is in the state or the small hit state (A3202). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3202 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3205). Special figure 1 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit medium state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3202 is “Y”), the process of step A3205 is performed without performing the processes of steps A3203 and A3204. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). Special figure 1 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3217.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is assigned to the special figure 1 game processing number. A special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3209).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3209, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 1 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 changing processing is executed (A3210). The details of the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1. Special Figure 1 Performing the processing during fluctuation (A3211). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 1 will be described later in FIG. 35.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare command according to the type of jackpot if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing is executed, which sets the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot, sets the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like (A3212). The details of the processing during display of Special FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs processing during opening of the large winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later in FIG. 39.

In step A3209, when the game processing number is "4", the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3214), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3209, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, a big prize for setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. The mouth residual ball treatment is executed (A3215).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), and special figure 1 information necessary for executing normal processing. (A3216), the special figure 1 jackpot end process for setting and the like is executed. The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process will be described later in FIG. 40.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1. The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is completed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 processes the steps A3202 to A3216. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218). , The lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is completed. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself may apparently continue on the special diagram 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the jackpot state (A3301). Special Figure 1 When the variable display game is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3301 is “N”), the jackpot switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3304). Special figure 2 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the process of step A3304 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). Special figure 2 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3323.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special figure 2 game processing timer It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (A3306). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. A timer value for length variation (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a long fluctuation and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the timer for the fluctuation time cannot be set with 2 bytes. Therefore, steps A3306-A3308 A timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared by repeating the counting of the timer value for long fluctuations for the number of repetitions by the process of.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is “Y”). , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and the game branching process according to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3311).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3311, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and sets the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 2 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 changing processing is executed (A3312). The details of the special drawing 2 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 2. Special Figure 2 Performing the processing during fluctuation (A3313). The details of the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 2 will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare command according to the type of jackpot if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing is executed, which sets the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot, sets the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like (A3314). The details of the processing during display of Special Figure 2 will be described later in FIG. 38.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs processing during opening of the large winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later in FIG. 39.

In step A3311, when the game processing number is "4", the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The process during opening of the large prize opening is executed (A3316), in which information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the large winning opening is set.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, a big prize for setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. The mouth residual ball treatment is executed (A3317).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process (the special figure 2 jackpot end process). A3318). The details of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing will be described later in FIG. 41.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit medium processing, and the like. The small hit fanfare process is executed (A3319). The details of the small hit fanfare process will be described later in FIG. 45.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3320).

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting the ending time, a small amount of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process, and the like. The hit remaining ball processing is executed (A3321).

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later in FIG.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2. The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is completed.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (A3210) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3401). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is not possible) (the result of A3401 is "N"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number. (A3416), save in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). Here, from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during processing during the special figure 2 display) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 2 jackpot end processing), and in the special figure 2 variation display game. From the end of the small hit fluctuation (during the processing during the display of the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the end processing of the special figure 2 small hit), it is said that the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the fluctuation.

When the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (the result of A3401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as the effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (the result of A3402 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and sets the effect command. (A3404), and the left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like is set (A3405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 0 (A3406). When the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reserved is 1 or more.

When the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"), the game control device 100 has variable start probability information corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state. The command is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3408). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, the decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time shortening fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3412), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, the information of the special figure 1 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3501). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is not possible) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, the special figure 2 variation display game fluctuates from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game (during processing during special figure 1 display) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 jackpot end processing). It is said that it cannot be started.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of holdings is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command. Then (A3503), the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3506), and executes the effect command setting process (A3506). A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3508), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3509). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, the information of the special figure 2 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

When the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0 (the result of A3502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a special figure 2.
It is determined whether or not the number of pending special figures 1 is 0 (A3512). When the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3512 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3513). When the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A3513 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3514). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3515).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes the effect command setting process (A3517). The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the special figure 2 hold number becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the number of special figures 1 held is not 0 (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. Therefore, the special figure 2 without preparing the customer waiting demo command, etc. As the game processing number, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). Also, when the special figure 1 is changing (the result of A3513 is "Y"), or when the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3514 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Instead, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519).

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1), prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). , The fall lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot, and the special figure. 1 Special figure 1 Stop symbol setting process (A3606a) related to setting of stop symbol (symbol information), Special figure 1 Change display Special figure 1 Information setting to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the game The process (A3607a) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3608a). ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3609a). A3610a) is executed. Then, the time reduction fluctuation number update process for updating the time reduction fluctuation number is executed (A3611a).

Next, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the processing number (A3612a) in order to shift to the special figure 1 changing processing, and saves the processing number in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (A3613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (on-data of the signal during change of special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the variation control flag area of FIG. 1 (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the indicator 1 indicator 51) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the special figure 1 (A3617a), and the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 is saved. The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol) is saved (A3618a), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the "big hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) is replaced with the "big hit flag 2", and the "special figure 1" is replaced with the "special figure 2". Since the same processing as that of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 variation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 variation start process, respectively.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, the details of the fall lottery processing (A3604a, A3604b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fall lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3701). When the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3701 is "N"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the value of the fall lottery random number of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Whether or not it is determined (A3702). When it is less than the lower limit determination value of the fall lottery (the result of A3702 is "Y"), the fall lottery process is terminated. When it is equal to or more than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "Y"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is equal to or less than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "N"), the value of the target fall lottery random number becomes a value between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Therefore, the processing at the time of winning the fall lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3704). Here, the signals relating to the high probability end are off-data (off-signal) of two jackpot signals and off-data (off-signal) of four jackpot signals. As a result, the signal regarding the high probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to the external device (hall computer or the like).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation. This is the off-data of the time reduction status signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, a number without a time reduction is saved in the game status display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the fall lottery process is completed. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time reduction state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the fall lottery is executed at the start of each special figure variation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low). The fall process (A3704-A3708) that falls to the probabilistic state) is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM (A3802). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). If the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3805). ), Judge whether the result of the judgment is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3801 is overwritten and saved (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Note that the jackpot flag 1 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), so that it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "Y"), or when the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot Flag 1 Ends the setting process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3901), and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM (A3903). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). If the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3906). ), Judge whether the result of the judgment is a big hit (A3907). When the result of the determination is a jackpot (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3902 (A3908), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Note that the jackpot flag 2 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area), so that it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

The game control device 100 acquires when the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "Y") or when the determination result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3907 is "N"). Based on the big hit random value, the small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is executed (A3909), and the result of the determination is determined whether or not it is a small hit (A3909). A3910). In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is "Y"), the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3901 is overwritten with the small hit information and saved (A3911). The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. When the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3805, A3906) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A4007), and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A4003). Then, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the special figure is not in the high probability (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the large hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). A small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure variation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the large hit random number is also used for determining the small hit, but it is also possible to provide an original small hit random number.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4103), and ends the small hit determination process. ..

Further, in the game control device 100, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "N"), whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
25 (a), (b), and (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24), and fall lottery process (FIG. 20). It is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability of.

In the example of FIG. 25A, the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the same regardless of the probability setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability (low probability state) in the low probability state tends to increase as the probability setting value increases (higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the more likely the jackpot to occur, and the player It will be advantageous. As described above, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 23 by the range of the jackpot random number values. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the range of the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the probability setting value in addition to the upper limit determination value.

Further, in setting 1 and 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (high probability state) and the jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. In addition, the jackpot probabilities may be different from each other in all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probabilities are the same, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to each probability set value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state, and regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit determination value and the small hit lower limit determination value in FIG. 24 by the range of the value of the large hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variable display game, small hits do not occur (small hit probability is zero). It should be noted that a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible.

In the example of FIG. 25 (c), the fall probability as the winning probability of the fall lottery does not depend on the probability setting value (setting), regardless of whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state, and the special figure. 1 It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether it is a variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value in FIG. 20 by the range of the fall lottery random numbers.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4201). When the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A4201 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4203), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4204). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4205), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4208), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4209). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4210), and the miss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212.

After steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4213). As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4301). When the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A4301 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4303), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4308), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4309). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is "N"), whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is displayed in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether it is saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4311). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4312), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4313). This process selects the type of specific result. Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4315), and the miss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

After steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4318). The decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A4320). ), Clear the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4321). After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and detects the game ball with the normal variable winning device 37. 2 As a variable display game based on the above, the variable display game execution means for executing the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special figure jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table illustrating the distribution of the types of jackpots (big hit symbol distribution) of the special figures 1 and 2 variable display games controlled by the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. Is. It should be noted that the distribution of the type of jackpot is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines the types of jackpots corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process and their distribution rates. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of jackpots are the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 4R probability variation jackpot, and the 10R normal jackpot (time reduction 100 times), which are common to the special figures 1 and 2 variable display games. In addition, a 10R normal big hit (time reduction number 0 times) may be provided.

The 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot (100 times of time reduction) are distributed at 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. It differs by 50%, 10%, and 40%. The distribution rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4401). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach, and the second half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not perform the process of step A4404 and updates and converts the first half offset data acquired in step A4402. Instead, the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and stores the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) in the fluctuation distribution of the RWM. Save in the information 2 area (A4406), and end the special figure 1 information setting process.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is a low probability state and a state without time reduction (a state without normal electric support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normal game). It is determined whether or not (in the state) (A4501). If the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4505.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & time saving state (the result of A4501 is "N"), that is, in the time saving state or the probabilistic state, the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is shortened in time. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (A4502). The time-shortening final variation is a final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-saving state. When the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is the time reduction final variation (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table (A4503) when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time-shortening final variation (the result of A4502 is "N"). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. ..

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when the player wins the fall lottery (FIG. 20) and falls from the probability variation state (high probability state) to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

The game control device 100 determines that the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "Y") or a time-reduced final variation (the result of A4502 is "Y"). ”), In order to secure time for notifying that the final fluctuation is made, the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit when the special figure variation display game to be started is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is “N”) ( A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4507 is "N"), set the first half offset data for the miss / small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability (A4508), and process in step A4510. Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a long-term variation (long variation).

In addition, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, since the latter half offset data for the long-term variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is not set, the special figure 2 variation display game has a normal variation time variation ( (Short fluctuation compared to long fluctuation). As a result, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, the small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits frequently occur due to the special figure 2 variation display game becomes possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4511), and saves the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). ) Is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets a variable group address table (A4601a), acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4602a), and prepares the variable pattern random number of FIG. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A4604a). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (the result of A4604a is "Y"), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605a), and the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte distribution process and the distribution process are processes for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the latter half variable group table is different for hit and miss, and the random numbers for distribution are 1 byte size for hit and 2 byte size for miss. The hit size is set to 1 byte size to save data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution (A4607a). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). .. Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611a), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612a). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616a), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process is the same as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, in which "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 31) is replaced with "special figure 2". Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b-A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a-A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3610a, A3610b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved sphere 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 used in the special figure 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5006), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5008 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long fluctuation (long-term fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not to start (A5009).

When the game control device 100 does not start the length variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5009 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5010), and the special figure 2 2 When the length variation of the variable display game is started (the result of A5009 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 game processing timer, the fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes), which is not enough for the 2-byte timer, fluctuates. Set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above-mentioned added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions of 9 times is saved, the timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2) The timer is subtracted in the game processing (FIG. 15) (A3304), and when the time is up (the result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3307), and the timer for length variation is added to the game processing timer. The value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again (A3308). As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game of long variation can have a long variation time of 60,000 msec + (60,000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuations saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5012 without setting the number of times the timer is repeated.

After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variable command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) of the target of the special figure change display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and changes the target special figure. The contents of the random number storage area related to the display game are shifted (A5016), and the free area after the shift is cleared (A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set the detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update process (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation number update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (in the probabilistic state) (A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure has a high probability (the result of A5101 is “Y”), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) (A5102). When the special figure game mode flag area is set with the special figure time reduction flag (in this embodiment, the special figure low probability & time reduction flag), it can be determined that the special figure time reduction is in progress. If the special figure time reduction is not in progress (the result of A5102 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1) when the special figure time is shortened (the special figure has a low probability and the normal electric support is provided) (the result of A5102 is "Y"). ) (A5103). The initial value of the time reduction fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 100 times (the big hit end setting process 2 described later). Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, the time reduction number of fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5104). When the time reduction variation number is not 0 (the result of A5104 is "N"), that is, when the time reduction state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 updates the time reduction variation number. End the process. When the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5104 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of time reduction in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal relating to the time saving end is off-data of two jackpot signals. As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time saving is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to the external device (hall computer or the like).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the time reduction end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signals related to the end of the time reduction here are, for example, off-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, off-data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, off-data of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and ordinary electric combination. Object 1 Off data of open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5107), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A5108). , The normal figure time reduction no flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A5109), and the time reduction fluctuation number update process is completed.

In this way, by executing the time reduction fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the normal gaming state (special figure low probability and normal) is appropriately changed from the time saving state (special figure low probability and state with normal electric support). It is possible to shift to the state without electric support).

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variable processing (A3211) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special FIG.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determination output times by +1 (A5301). The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game is fixed to an external device. Will be done. Next, the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of the special figure 1, and 2000 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is stored in the special figure 1 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also running). It is determined whether or not (A5308). If the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5308 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5319. When the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of A5308 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the process during display of the special figure 2 described later is being executed (A5309).

When the process being displayed in Special Figure 2 is being executed (the result of A5309 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5311. When the special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5309 is "N"), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5311) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304), so that it is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decoration special figure 2 as an effect command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the effect command setting process (A5314). A5315). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped as a result of being missed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the deviation result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is missed. As a result, the fluctuation will be forcibly terminated (forced termination).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is timed up (A3206). Since the result is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320), and large from the above-mentioned special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area. The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5323) for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed, and the special figure 1 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area or executing a process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to move to processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during the change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variable processing (A3313) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special FIG.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determination output times by +1 (A5401). The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is fixed to an external device. .. Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5403). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 2, and 136 msec if it is a small hit symbol of special figure 2. is there. The display time of the out-of-order symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

In the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of alignment (the result of A5407 is “N”), whether or not the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also running). Is determined (A5408). If the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5408 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5423. When the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of A5408 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 game interruption flag when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5409 is "N"), that is, when it is a small hit (A5412). , Ornamental special figure 1 A break command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5414). After that, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 1 is changing), when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that has been interrupted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is completed. You can restart the variable display game.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (). A5410). When the process being displayed in Special Figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5415. When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set (A5415) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205), so that it is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decoration special figure 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the effect command setting process (A5418). A5419). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as a result of being missed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forced with an off result. The fluctuation ends (execution ends).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), so that when the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 2. Load from the stop symbol save area and save in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5425).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5428), which sets the settings for executing the special figure 2 display process, is executed, and the special figure 2 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 2 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 2 game process number area and executing the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game. Perform the processing necessary to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first loads the jackpot flag 1 (indicating jackpot information or missed information) from the jackpot flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the jackpot flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, based on the jackpot flag 1, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot (A5703).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal and the on-data of the special symbol 1 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes the effect command setting process (A5706). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, the jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5709). The signal here includes on-data (on-signal) of two jackpot signals and on-data (on-signal) of three jackpot signals. In the present embodiment, it is irrelevant because the 2R jackpot does not exist, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal is turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5710), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the processing number (A5712) in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing, saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5713), and fanfares. / Interval processing The transition setting processing is executed (A5714), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, the processing for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is executed. Specifically, as signals related to the start of the jackpot, on-data (on-signal) of one jackpot signal and on-data (on-signal) of four jackpot signals are saved in the external information output data area. In addition, the signal related to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time reduction fluctuation number region for holding the time reduction fluctuation number is cleared. Also, clear the number of rounds area to 0.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is "N"), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is If it is out of alignment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the fall lottery (FIG. 20) is won. If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a time-saving final variation (A5716). The time-shortening final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time-saving state. When the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5716 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5724.

The game control device 100 has a probability information command (low) indicating a low probability when the final variation has a high probability (the result of A5715 is “Y”) or when the final variation has a reduced time (the result of A5716 is “Y”). Probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5719), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in a small hit state (A5721). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is in a small hit state (the result of A5721 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5724.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5721 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5722). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5723). , Clear the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. Save the processing number (A5725). Then, the processing during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 2. FIG. 38A shows the first half portion of the special drawing 2 display processing, and FIG. 38B shows the second half portion of the special drawing 2 display processing.

First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating the small hit information or the loss information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801), and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 (indicating the jackpot information or the missed information) is loaded from the jackpot flag 2 area (A5803), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special symbol 2 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal and the on-data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes the effect command setting process (A5808). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, the jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5809), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5811). The signal here includes on-data of 2 jackpot signals and on-data of 3 jackpot signals. In the present embodiment, it is irrelevant because the 2R jackpot does not exist, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal is turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5812), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5815), executes the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (A5816), and ends the special figure 2 display processing. .. The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process is the same as that executed in the process displayed in Special Figure 1.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is "N"), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. Whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) is determined (A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5818). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-saving final variation (A5819). If the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5819 is “N”), the processing of steps A5820 to A5823 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of step A5824.

The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (the result of A5818 is “Y”) or the time reduction final variation (the result of A5819 is “Y”). ”), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5822), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5823). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5824), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5825). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes the effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8-) that notifies that it is right-handed In order to light D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in the game control device 100, since the lower prize opening is opened by a small hit in the present embodiment, the lower grand prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A5830), and the lower grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in (A5831), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process is executed (A5832), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. Although the big winning opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 does not have to be changed.

In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process, a process for shifting to the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the small hit fanfare, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Further, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal regarding the start of the small hit (on-data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit (on-data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status area.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variation display game. If the result of the above is out of order, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5833). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-saving final variation (A5834). If the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5834 is “N”), the processing of steps A5835 to A5839 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of step A5840.

The game control device 100 has a probability information command (low probability) when the final variation has a high probability (the result of A5833 is "Y") or when the final variation is time reduction (the result of A5834 is "Y"). Is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5837), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn off the second game state display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) that notifies that the game is right-handed. Is saved (A5839), and the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. Save the processing number (A5841). Then, the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter that counts the remaining balls of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. When the remaining sphere counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (the result of A6002 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A6010.

When the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed at the normal drawing start gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. That is, until the right-handed hit is started and the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, the process does not shift to the process related to the big hit (such as the process while the big winning opening is open).

The game control device 100 sets information regarding the start of the jackpot when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "Y"), that is, when the right-handed hit is started. Execute (A6004-A6009). First, the round number upper limit value table is set (A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table, and the round number upper limit value area of RWM is obtained. Save to (A6005). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R and 4R.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table and saves it in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in the present embodiment, since the upper prize opening is opened by the big hit, the upper prize entrance fraudulent prize number area is cleared (A6007), and the fraud monitoring period outside flag is set in the RWM upper prize prize fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (A6008), and the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number of rounds region by +1 (A6010). Since the number of rounds in the number of rounds area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, it is 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time. After that, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as the effect command (A6011), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves the game in the jackpot processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once in one round, the upper limit is suddenly set as the initial value. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated, the initial value does not have to be 0, but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value may be used (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Next, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6016). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round).

The game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017) when the lever solenoid operation round is performed (the result of A6016 is “Y”). Here, the lever solenoid opens the specific area 86 in a long time in the case of a probability variation jackpot (10R or 4R probability variation jackpot) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot). The operation data of 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "4" as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (A6019), and determines whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6019). A6020). When it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save to the timer area (A6022). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save to the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) regarding the start of opening of the upper prize opening in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the solenoid of the winning opening of the RWM. Turn on the upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) in the data area. Save the upper prize opening on data (A6026), clear the number of big winning openings count (A6027), and process during fanfare / interval. To finish.

In the present embodiment, there are only big hits that open only the upper big winning opening, but two types of big hits that open only the upper big winning opening and the big hit that opens only the lower big winning opening may be provided. It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower prize openings.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

The game control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the jackpot end setting process 1 is executed in order to shift to the normal gaming state after the jackpot ends (A6102), and when the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, the jackpot is hit. The jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to the time saving state after the end (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round) in the case of the probability variation jackpot (10R or 4R probability variation jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is the specific area. The passage of the game ball to 86 (V winning) is almost certainly detected (regular passage in a specific area). Then, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed to the specific area 86 (V winning) when there is a detection signal of the specific area switch 72 in the RAM. is there.

Even in the jackpot round 1 in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened only for a very short time, but the specific area switch 72 is an accidental game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). Passage (V prize) may be detected (irregular passage in a specific area). Also in this case, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

When there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is “N”), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A6106. On the other hand, when there is information passing through a specific area (the result of A6104 is "Y"), the jackpot end setting process 3 is executed (A6105) in order to shift to the probability change state (probability fluctuation state) after the jackpot ends. In this case, the data set in the jackpot end setting process 3 is overwritten with the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, and the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 is invalidated. Become.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6106). In the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low-probability or high-probability probability state or a time-saving state is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there has been an irregular passage in the specific area (A6107). As described above, the specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage) means that the game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a normal big hit, and the specific area regular passage (specific area normal passage) means. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the game ball passes through the specific area 86. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area has passed irregularly. In addition to the regular passage in the specific area, even if the irregular passage in the specific area occurs, the state shifts to the probability change state (probability fluctuation state) after the end of the big hit.

The game control device 100 adds irregular probability variation information to the loaded probability information command when there is an irregular passage in a specific area (the result of A6107 is “Y”) (A6108), and includes this probability information. The effect command setting process is executed so that the command is set as the effect command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no irregular passage in the specific area (the result of A6107 is "N"), the effect command setting process is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as the effect command as it is (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A6110), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6111). Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (A6112). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot here are off-data of one jackpot signal and off-data of three jackpot signals.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signals related to the end of the jackpot here are, for example, off-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, off-data of the signal during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory, off-data of the signal per special symbol 1, and off-data of the signal per special symbol 2. Is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A6115), and the special figure status area is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

This special figure 2 game wait time value determines the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been forcibly terminated (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and is used for the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to sometimes delay. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle.

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) that is performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) in which the special figure 1 jackpot end process is executed ( In A1314) of FIG. 7, since the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game starts (starts within the timer interrupt process of this time), the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a problem because it starts first. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1 normal processing during special figure 1 game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt cycle (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process). This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. (Special figure 2 during game processing, special figure 2 normal processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game processing) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing at the same time. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with an outlier symbol (forced termination or originally not changed).

If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started before the special figure 1 variable display game after the jackpot state ends, the process of step A6717 is omitted. FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game weight time value.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing.

Special Figure 2 jackpot end processing steps A6201 to A6216 replace "Special Figure 1" in Special Figure 1 jackpot end processing steps A6101 to A6116 with "Special Figure 2", respectively. Since the same processing as in the processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

It is not necessary to set the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change. (Inside the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing), and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. Because it can be done.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6102, A6202) in the special figures 1 and 2 jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of no time reduction state (no time reduction) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal relating to the start without the time saving state is off-data of two jackpot signals. The signal relating to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signals related to the start without the time saving state are the special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off data, and the special symbol 2 variation. It is the off data of the time shortening state signal, the off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the off data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303), saves the normal figure time saving flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6304), and saves the special figure game. Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the mode flag area (A6305). The flag for no time reduction in the normal map indicates that the game is not in the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and the time saving state (normal power support state) is not reached.

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction fluctuation frequency region to 0 (A6306), and saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the off data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data region (A6307). .. Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery is used. The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6103, A6203) in the special figures 1 and 2 jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the time saving state (time saving) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signals related to the start with the time saving state are the special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal on data, and the special symbol 2 variation. The on-data of the time shortening state signal, the on-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the on-data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6503), saves the flag with the time saving state in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6504), and saves the special figure game. Save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the mode flag area (A6505). The flag with time reduction in the normal map indicates that the game is in the time saving variable state (time saving state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of big hit is low probability and the time saving state (normal power support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction fluctuation number area for storing the time reduction fluctuation number (A6506), and indicates that the time reduction state is in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. The information command (time reduction) is saved (A6507), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

Since the right-handed state is advantageous from the big-hit state, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big-hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 3 (A6105, A6205) in the special figures 1 and 2 jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signals related to the start with high probability & time reduction are special symbol 1 high probability state signal on-data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on-data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal on-data, special symbol. 2 It is on-data of the fluctuation time shortened state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time reduction flag indicates that the jackpot probability is high probability and the time reduction state (here, the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to light the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6806), and the power failure recovery transmission command area is used. The probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing during small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening as an effect command (A6901), and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower prize opening. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) in the test signal output data area (A6906), and saves the signal in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the lower prize opening on-data (A6907). As a result, the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening count area for storing the count number (detection number) of the large winning opening count switch (lower special winning opening switch 38a and / or upper large winning opening switch 39a). Then (A6908), the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

In the present embodiment, there is only a small hit opening pattern in which the large winning opening opens only once, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which the large winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing in the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Next, the signal related to the end of the small hit (special symbol 2 small hit signal off data) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is a low probability state and a state without time reduction (a state without normal electric support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normally). It is determined whether or not the player is in the gaming state (A7307). When it is not during the special figure low probability & no time reduction (during the normal gaming state) (the result of A7307 is "N"), the processes after step A7310 are executed.

The game control device 100 outputs a signal related to a left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (the result of A7307 is "Y"). Save in the test signal output data area (A7308), save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A7309), and determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (A7309). A7310).

When the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (the result of A7310 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311), and executes the effect command setting process. (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A7310 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313) without preparing the decorative special figure 1 restart command, and the special figure 2 End the small hit end process

For the same reason as in the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to set the game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started with the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 as a timekeeping means (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the game machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004 may be executed). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), A predetermined effect may be executed, but a plurality of The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate at long time intervals becomes smaller as the set value is larger. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be drawn so that the selection rate for a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Execute the effect display editing process (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0021, it returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y]), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later in FIG. 49 below. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, the process of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower ranks of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command (the value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for commanding a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and there is a variable command (set in the variable start information setting process). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit command is a command for commanding an operation related to the effect during hit (display of fanfare screen or round screen, etc.). For example, a jackpot fanfare command (set by processing during special figure display), a round command (fanfare / Interval command (set by processing during interval opening), interval command (set by processing while opening large winning opening), ending command (set by processing while opening large winning opening), small hit fanfare command, command during opening small hit (small hit round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command), etc. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the hit command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a low probability state, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is executed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability), and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, look-ahead is executed. A look-ahead symbol-based command process may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

When the MODE unit does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. In addition, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is completed.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is performed. finish.

When the MODE unit does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the power failure recovery command (B1305). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (". B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, and a state on command as error / illegal commands. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the state off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316). Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE section then sends a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). It is determined whether or not it represents (set by etc.) (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the effect control device 300 does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents an out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE unit represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a set value information command (probability set value information command) when the MODE unit does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is “N”). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE unit represents the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of receiving the set value, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the setting change type command (B1325). As a command for changing the setting, for example, there is a command (A1030) for changing the probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation command when the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “N”) (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) for confirming probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command during probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is played after all the symbols are stopped. The state flag is set to the normal state (B1332), and the one-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit". Is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent the symbol stop command (B1329 result is "N"), or if the MODE section command is not normal (B1330 result is "N"), the effect control device. 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, when the MODE unit represents the decorative special figure 1 interrupt command (A5413) or the decorative special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the effect control device 300 is set to the decorative special figure 1. A process of interrupting or resuming the variable display game may be executed.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is being waited for (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and sets a look-ahead variation MODE command. Acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit corresponding to the MODE unit (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT section corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACTION section (ACT section) is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. When both the converted MODE section and ACT section are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE section and ACT section corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Hold changes When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal look-ahead change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there are different types of reach for the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. .. For example, there are various types of normal reach, such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is considered that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the look-ahead fluctuation command area. (B1711), the look-ahead lottery process regarding the latest hold look-ahead effect is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the pre-reading effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), set and save the display corresponding to the pre-reading effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved or when the number of holds is reduced) (B1717). ). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold look-ahead effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or when the generated look-ahead effect does not start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"). As it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to the out-of-order symbol, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 28, the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undecided (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904). A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). In addition, there are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, the number is updated by -1. (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 54) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the first half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and set value (probability setting value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is reach fluctuation, the effect control device 300 includes the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode. Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability setting value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address of (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability setting value) (B2007), and set the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). After that, a stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the advance notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the setting suggestion effect (B2014). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is set (B2015), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (B2016). Subsequently, the display of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is set. For example, the display of reducing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is set, and the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2017). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is possible to set the voice number and the decoration number not only based on the effect content but also by drawing with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the game machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2019), and in addition to the first to third special symbols, the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information). 4 Set the display setting of the symbol variation with respect to (B2020). The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, and / or the display device 41.

[Hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the hit command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect. Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 is set to during fanfare (B2103), and the hit system command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and is currently The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set during the round (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval ("N". B2107). When the MODE unit represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game of the current game machine 10. The game status flag indicating the status (P machine status) is set during the interval (B2108, B2109), and the hit system command processing is terminated. There is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once with a small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

When the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents the ending (the result of B2107 is "N"). B2110). When the MODE unit represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 determines the ending effect for setting the ending effect. The setting process is executed, the ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command process is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the hit command process without executing any process. To do.

Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 66.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period in relation to the special figure variation display game will be described. As a specific example, when a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is started, and the first setting suggestion effect (setting notification) is started before the normal reach (first reach) occurs. The case where the second setting suggestion effect is executed before the end of the special figure variation display game after the SP reach occurs (it does not have to occur) after the normal reach is performed will be described. The plurality of times may be not only two times but also three times or more.

In the setting suggestion effect, for example, when displaying a variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4), for example, characters A, B, and C (characters having shapes, colors, and patterns that can be distinguished from each other) are displayed. It is an effect of displaying and making it possible to suggest a probability setting value currently set by the number of displayed characters, and it occurs with a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in this embodiment). Further, the setting suggestion effect also occurs at a timing other than the variable display game (for example, when the ball out error is canceled).

The character A suggests, for example, a so-called odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of the odd number probability setting values (1, 3, 5) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests (notifies) that there is. The internal probability setting values 1 to 6 stored in the probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively.

The character B suggests, for example, an even number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of the even number probability setting values (2, 4, 6) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests (notifies) that there is.

Character C suggests, for example, that the currently set probability setting value is one of the high setting (probability setting value (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6) (notification). Is what you do.

In the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively. In the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively, but 4 to 10 characters are easily selected. For example, the difference in the number of displayed characters A, B, and C is made more remarkable than in the first case, and which character is used to suggest the setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100). You may be able to judge.

[Reliability of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect by the character (character) can be set by the number of characters A, B, and C. By drawing the number of characters with a winning probability according to the setting, the reliability can be set according to the number of characters. When the lottery is performed by distributing to each number, the winning probability is the distribution rate (selection rate). If each number is drawn independently instead of being sorted, duplicate winnings may be made (for example, 4 and 7), but in that case, one of the winnings is selected.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be performed only by the character having the maximum number among the characters A, B, and C (the number of characters whose number is not the maximum may be drawn and displayed regardless of the setting so as not to suggest the setting. To do).

As described above, in the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters A, B, and C are displayed, respectively. Therefore, when the number of each of the characters A to C is 1, 2, or 3, each is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting.

As described above, in the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively, so that the number of each of the characters A to C is 1, 2, 3, and so on. In the case of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10, each is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting. Since it is easy to select 4 to 10 pieces, the winning probability of 4 to 10 pieces is remarkably larger than the winning probability of 1 to 3 pieces (extremely, the winning probability of 1 to 3 pieces is set to zero). To do).

As shown in FIG. 58, the reliability is set to increase by 10% each time the number of characters A, B, and C displayed increases by 1, and the reliability is set to 100% when 10 characters are displayed. can do. For example, one, two, and three characters C appear evenly in any setting, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of a high setting is low.

Further, the reliability shown in FIG. 58 can be multiplied by the ratio of the total number of displayed characters to the number of displayed characters with the largest number of displayed characters.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable display game. For example, the first and second settings are set so that the specific character increases, and the second setting is performed. In the suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified by the magnitude of the increase amount of a specific character (not the number of characters). For example, the setting suggestion by the character with the largest increase amount may be set as the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the magnitude of the increase amount. It is possible.

As described above, the setting suggestion effect is set in step B2012 and step B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55).

[Expectation of big hit]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment and the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the present embodiment, the expectation of "big hit" is set high when the setting suggestion effect occurs, and low when the setting suggestion effect does not occur. FIG. 59 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

When a "big hit" occurs, the rate at which the "big hit" occurs after the setting suggestion effect is 80%, and the rate at which the "big hit" occurs without the setting suggestion effect is 20%.

On the contrary, when "disengagement" occurs, the ratio of "disengagement" after the setting suggestion effect is 1%, and the ratio of "disengagement" without the setting suggestion effect is 99%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a "big hit" will occur after that, and even if there is no setting suggestion effect, the player will generate a "big hit". Can give a surprise to.

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), setting suggestion is performed by changing the first mode (for example, number, color) of the character appearing in the setting suggestion effect, and the big hit is performed in the second mode (for example, size) of the character. It is also possible to inform the degree of expectation. As described above, it is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by the character having the largest number of displayed characters among the characters A, B, and C. Further, when any one of the characters A, B, and C has a different color from the other characters, the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by the character having the different color. It is also possible to produce.

When a "big hit" occurs, the ratio of the "big hit" occurring after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 50%, and the "big hit" is displayed after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate at which "" occurs is 30%, and the rate at which "big hit" occurs without setting suggestion effect is 20%.

On the contrary, when "missing" occurs, the ratio of "missing" after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 1%, and after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate at which "missing" occurs is 1%, and the rate at which "missing" occurs without setting suggestion effect is 98%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a "big hit" will occur after that, and by performing the setting suggestion effect with a character having a particularly large display, that expectation can be obtained. It can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of a setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which a setting suggestion effect is executed when the decorative special figure variation display game in which the variation display develops into the SP reach through the normal reach is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed before the normal reach (first time) and when the SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

FIG. 60 (A1) is a display screen when starting a decorative special figure variation display game. A variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610B) is arranged in the central portion of the display device 41, and the decorative stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, a variable display area 615 is arranged in the lower right corner of the display device 41, and stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 have a number “3” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a special figure 2 hold, respectively. The number "0" indicating the number is displayed.

In the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold is placed in the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the display unit 630a moves. At present, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b that displays the second start memory as the second hold display (second start memory display).

After that, in (A2), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) is executed as the identification information. ↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. The left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are varied in the left region 610A, the right region 610B, and the middle region 610C of the variable display area 610, respectively. In addition, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the special figure change display game being executed (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ing.

At this time, as the first setting suggestion effect, a plurality of characters A (bear), character B (frog), and character C (tiger) are displayed on the display device 41. In (A2), two characters A, two characters B, and one character C are displayed, but at present, the reliability of the setting suggestion of character A is 20%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of character B is 20%. Is 20%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C is 10%, and it is not so clear which character makes the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100).

However, for a player who knows that the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times, it can be predicted that the setting suggestion effect will be performed with high reliability in the next setting suggestion effect, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way. Even if it is a setting suggestion effect, the player can pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

The display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image of each character's facial expression and display position.

Next, in (A3), the reach state (normal reach) is set, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first setting suggestion effect ends. In (A3), the display of each character is erased, but the display may be continued as it is. At this time, the character display 755a "reach" is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (A4), the reach evolves from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, the movie production (movie production) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left and right symbols are in the upper corner of the screen. Moving. At this time, the display of the character display 755a "reach" may be erased.

In addition, with the transition to SP3 reach, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Here, for example, characters A, B, and C are displayed around the movie effect (movie effect), and more characters than the first setting suggestion effect are displayed. In (A4), three characters A, four characters B, and five characters C are displayed. Here, an example in which setting suggestion is performed based on the number of characters C (5) having the largest number of displayed characters is shown, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C (probability setting value is either 5 or 6) is set to 50%. Can be displayed (set) as.

In addition, the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C is determined by the ratio of the number of characters C having the largest number of displays (5) to the total number of characters displayed (3 + 4 + 5 = 12) (5/12) × 50% = 20. It can also be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by the character C is higher, a lottery may be made so that the number of characters A or B displayed is reduced from the first time in the second setting suggestion effect. ..

Further, one character C is displayed at the first time, five characters are displayed at the second time, and the number of displayed characters is increased by four. Therefore, for example, the increase in the reliability per character can be set to 10%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the second character C can be set to 4 × 10% of the increase (regardless of the number).

After that, in (A5), the special figure variation display game ends and the setting suggestion effect also ends, the jackpot decoration stop symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610, and the jackpot stop symbol "3" , 3, 3 ”is displayed in the variable display area 615. In addition, the character display 755b "Big hit !!" is displayed below the decorative stop symbol. Further, at this time, the changing hold display 633a displayed in the hold digestion area 640 disappears, so that it can be confirmed that one hold has been completely digested.

Subsequently, in (A6), the jackpot round game is started, the jackpot state (special game state) is set, and the production of the jackpot round is started. In addition, in the above setting suggestion effect (first time and / or second time), by displaying the characters A, B, and C larger than those shown in FIG. 60, the expectation of the big hit is further higher. It may be notified (set).

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (first modification)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modification, a pseudo continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations (three times) is executed before the normal reach occurs, the first setting suggestion effect occurs during the second pseudo variation, and the second pseudo variation occurs. The setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo-variation. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo variations may be determined, for example, in step B2010 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55). The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which a pseudo variation for varying and temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variation display game.

Character A (red) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called odd number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an odd number probability setting value (1,3) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 5) is suggested.

Character B (blue) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called even number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an even number of probability setting values (2, 4) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 6) suggests that it is one of them.

For character C (yellow) (FIG. 62A), for example, the currently set probability setting value is a high setting (any of the probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests that there is.

In the first modification, a group effect of forming and displaying a character group by a plurality of characters is executed. In the character group, the total number of characters A (red) and B (blue) is made constant (or almost constant), and the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even or odd is notified according to the ratio. .. In the character group, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is the high setting "5, 6" is further notified by the number of characters C (yellow). The characters A and B may have the same shape only by changing the color.

Since character A (red) and character B (blue) suggest odd-numbered settings and even-numbered settings, which are mutual exclusivity events, keep the total number constant and use the ratio of character A (red) and character B (blue). The reliability of the setting suggestion can be notified.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is 7: 3, and in the second setting suggestion effect, character A (red): character B (blue). By setting the ratio of the number to 9: 1, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting in which the probability setting value is an odd number. For example, at a ratio of 7: 3, the reliability of the odd number setting is 70% (the reliability of the even number setting is 30%), and at a ratio of 9: 1, the reliability of the odd number setting is 90% (the reliability of the even number setting is 90%). It can be 10%).

Conversely, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is 3: 7, and in the second setting suggestion effect, character A (red): character B. By setting the ratio of the number of (blue) to 1: 9, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion of the even number setting in which the probability setting value is even. For example, at a ratio of 3: 7, the reliability of even-numbered settings is 70% (the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 30%), and at a ratio of 1: 9, the reliability of even-numbered settings is 90% (the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 90%). It can be 10%).

Further, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is set to 5, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is increased to 7, for example. It is also possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion that the set value is a high setting.

In the first modification, for example, when character C (character A or character B may be used) is not displayed in the first setting suggestion effect, or when neither character A, character B, or character C is displayed, a big hit is achieved. Expectations can be set as low. Further, when all the characters A, B, and C are displayed, it is possible to set it as having a high expectation of a big hit.

It is also possible to set the expectation of the jackpot to change based on the change in the displayed size and color of the characters A, B, and C. When the character performing the setting suggestion effect indicates that the expectation of the jackpot is high in this way, it may be performed together with the display mode change indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high in the pending display 633a during the change of the holding digestion area 640. , The change in the display mode may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen transition diagram (first modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62A (B1) is the same as FIG. 60 (A1). (B2) of FIG. 62A is the same as (A2) of FIG. 60, but the variation display displayed in the variation display area 610 is the first pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect.

Then, in (B3), the first pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect. Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the character display 752 "pseudo 2 times" indicating the number of times the pseudo variation is executed (pseudo-ream number) to be started from now on is displayed.

After that, in (B4), the second pseudo-variation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. For example, as shown in (B4), an image in which a meteor shower by character A (star-shaped ★), character B (star-shaped ☆), and character C (triangle Δ) flows from the right to the left of the screen flows for a predetermined time. Then, it is possible to notify that the expectation of a big hit is high by flowing the video.

At this time, for example, the ratio of the number of characters displayed for character A (red) to the number of characters displayed for character B (blue) is 7: 3, and it is notified that the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting is slightly high. ing. Further, since the character C (yellow) is also displayed, the display of the character C (yellow) can suggest that the setting is high with a predetermined reliability (may be FIG. 58). While the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is being performed, the character display 752 "pseudo-twice" may be displayed or deleted.

Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. Further, also in (B5), the character display 752 "pseudo-twice" may remain displayed or may be erased. The second pseudo-variation continues in the variation display area 610.

Then, in (B6), the second pseudo variation is completed and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the character display 752 "pseudo 3 times" indicating the number of executions of the pseudo variation to be started (pseudo-ream number) is displayed.

After that, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the third pseudo-variation (↓↓↓) of the variable decoration special symbol (large symbol) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined time.

After that, in (B8), the second setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. At this time, similarly to (B4), an image in which a meteor shower by characters A, B, and C flows from the right to the left of the screen flows for a predetermined time. However, this time, the ratio of the display number of the character A (red) to the display number of the character B (blue) is 9: 1, and the reliability suggesting that the setting is an odd number is further higher.

Further, since the number of characters C (yellow) displayed has also increased from 5 to 7, it is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased by the increase (see FIG. 58). On the contrary, if the number of characters C (yellow) displayed does not increase or decreases in the second setting suggestion effect, it is notified that the reliability of the setting suggestion by displaying the character C (yellow) is not so high. You can also do it.

Next, in (B9), the reach state is reached, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. In this case, since the pseudo continuous effect is completed, the pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed in the middle region 610C. In addition, the character display 755 "reach" is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (B10), the special figure variation display game ends, and the "off" stop symbol "3, 1, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. Further, at this time, the changing hold display 633a displayed in the hold digestion area 640 disappears, so that it can be confirmed that one hold has been completely digested.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (second modification)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the game machine 10, a character zone effect (for example, a notice effect using the entire display screen) may be performed with a predetermined probability based on a hold prize with a high expectation of a big hit, and this character zone effect causes a big hit. It is possible to notify that the degree of expectation is high.

Therefore, in the second modification, the setting suggestion effect is performed with a predetermined probability when the character zone is entered, and the appearance of the setting suggestion effect notifies that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when only the character zone occurs.

In addition, the character zone continues until the hold that triggered the entry into the character zone is exhausted, and during that time, a plurality of variable display games are played along with the hold digestion. At this time, the setting suggestion effect is performed every time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time.

As described above, in the second modification, the character zone effect is executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games as a look-ahead effect based on hold (look-ahead zone effect), and the look-ahead variation command processing (Fig. It is set in 52). Not limited to this, the character zone effect occurs at a predetermined trigger (timing) such as when the expectation of a big hit of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is high, and is executed over a plurality of fluctuation display games. Anything may be used, and it may be set by a variable effect setting process (FIG. 55) or the like.

In the second modification, when the first start memory (which may be the second start memory) already has three holds (hold 3, hold 2, hold 1), the hold (hold 0) with a high expectation of a big hit is Consider the case where a prize is won and the hold is consumed in the order of hold 3, hold 2, hold 1, hold 0.

Then, the first setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 3 is digested, the second setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 2 is digested, and the third setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 1 is digested. At the time of digestion of hold 0, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, two characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Character C that suggests is not displayed (0 is displayed).

In the second setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, three characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. One character C suggesting is displayed.

In the third setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Four characters C suggesting are displayed.

In the fourth setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Seven characters C suggesting are displayed.

In this way, the number of characters displayed by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) that suggests the intended setting is increased as the number of special figure variation display games is repeated. In FIG. 63, since the number of displayed characters B increases and is larger than that of character A, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even is higher than the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is odd. It can be judged that it is expensive.

In addition, the number of characters C displayed increases as the number of special figure variation display games increases, such as 0, 1, 4, and 7, so the setting is higher depending on the display mode (increase amount) of the character C. It is also possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion of is high.

On the contrary, if the number of characters C displayed does not increase or decreases even if the number of special figure variation display games is repeated, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting is high depending on the display mode (decrease amount) of the character C is high. It is also possible to notify that it is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modification)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 64A (C1) is a display screen when the decorative special figure variation display game is started, and a stop symbol is displayed as in FIG. 60 (A1). The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "4" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ..

In (C1), the hold display 633 (hold 3) moves to the right (hold shift) in the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as the first hold display, and at the same time, the hold digestion area 640 of the quadrangular frame The hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves.

Here, the hold display 633 (hold 0) displayed on the first hold display unit 630a is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing a setting suggestion effect. As a result, the hold display 633 (hold 0) notifies that the color and the like are changed to a different display mode from the other hold and the degree of expectation is high, but the display mode may be omitted.

After that, in (C2), the same variation display as in (A3) of FIG. 60 is performed, and the digestion of the hold 3 is started. At this time, the changing hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 3) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “3”.

Further, when the digestion of the hold 3 is started, the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the character zone is entered, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 changes.

In (C2), three characters A (bear) are displayed, two characters B (frogs) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

By the way, as described above, the hold display 633 (hold 0) is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing a setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is also possible to enter the character zone at the stage where the hold 0 is won (the stage before (C1)). However, by rushing into the character zone when the hold 3 is digested, the degree of attention to the hold 3 can be increased.

After that, in (C3), the first variable display game ends, and the "missing" stop symbol "3, 2, 9" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. When 633a also disappears, the hold 3 is digested. At this time, the characters A and B move to positions that do not overlap with the stop symbols "3, 2, 9", or are erased, so that the first setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C4), the same variation display as in (C2) is performed, and the digestion of Hold 2 is started. At this time, the changing hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 2) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “2”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of Hold 2, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bear) are displayed, three characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. One is displayed.

After that, in (C5), the second variable display game ends, and the stop symbol "5, 7, 8" of "off" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is held. When 633a also disappears, Hold 2 is digested. At this time, the characters A, B, and C move to positions that do not overlap with the stop symbols "5, 7, 8", or are erased, so that the second setting suggestion effect also ends.

Next, in (C6), the same variation display as in (C2) and (C4) is performed, and the digestion of Hold 1 is started. At this time, the changing hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 1) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “1”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of Hold 1, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, 3 characters A (bear) are displayed, 5 characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Four are displayed.

After that, in (C7), the third variable display game ends, and the "off" stop symbol "4, 2, 1" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. When 633a also disappears, Hold 1 is digested. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C move to a position where they do not overlap with the stop symbol "4, 2, 1", or are deleted, so that the third setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C8), the same variation display as in (C2), (C4) and (C6) is performed, and the digestion of hold 0 is started. At this time, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 0) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “0”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 0, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed, 3 characters A (bear) are displayed, 5 characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Seven are displayed.

After that, in (C9), the fourth variable display game ends, and the "off" stop symbol "2, 6, 9" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. When 633a also disappears, Hold 1 is exhausted, which ends the character zone. At this time, the fourth setting suggestion effect is completed by deleting the characters A, B, and C.

[Other setting suggestion effects]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 by the right-handed instruction display 620 of the hitting instruction display instead of the character. In this case, the higher the number of right-handed instruction displays 620, the higher the reliability of the high setting.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a timing when the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41 even during the special figure variation display game. In the example of FIG. 65, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state, such as during a big hit fanfare, the right-handed instruction display 620 executes the setting suggestion effect. In this way, by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked. In addition, at the time of a big hit fanfare, a display 621 "Aim at the gate !!" is also displayed, which suggests that a game ball be launched at the normal drawing start gate 34 by hitting right.

When a distribution gate for selecting the upper limit of the number of rounds of the jackpot is provided in the game area 32 on the right side, the display 621 may indicate that the distribution gate is aimed at instead of the normal start gate 34. Since the jackpot round does not start until the game ball passes through the distribution gate, it is possible to further prevent overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect. In the example of FIG. 66, the setting suggestion effect is executed when an error (here, a ball-out error) that the player does not intentionally cause and the game must be interrupted occurs. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to.

During the decorative special figure variation display game started in (D1) of FIG. 66, a ball out error occurs due to the detection of the shoot ball out switch signal as shown in (D2), and the error display 623 "ball out error" is displayed. Will be done. The character 625 is displayed together with the error display 623, and the reliability of the high setting is notified depending on the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625. After that, as in (D3), the character 625 is displayed together with the error release display 627 "the error has been released" indicating that the error has been released, and similarly depending on the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625. The reliability of the high setting is notified.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
According to the above, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game that fluctuates and displays the identification information, and the stop result of the variable display game. Is a setting changing means (setting key switch 93) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) according to a setting related to the game in the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained. , RAM initialization switch 112), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the information (probability set value) regarding the set value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.

With the above configuration, the player is produced by performing the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times in a predetermined period (for example, a period of one variable display game or a period spanning a plurality of variable display games) in relation to the variable display game or the like. It is possible to focus on the game and enhance the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times in one variable display game.

With the above configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect and concentrate on the game by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display games.

With the above configuration, it is possible to draw the player attention to the effect and concentrate on the game by performing the setting suggestion effect according to the timing of the effect performed over the plurality of variable display games such as the zone effect.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has such that the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed later is higher than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed earlier. , Set multiple setting suggestion effects.

With the above configuration, by providing a difference in the reliability of the setting suggestion depending on the timing, the player can enjoy waiting for the setting suggestion effect to appear at a specific timing while watching the effect. Therefore, by increasing the expectation for the setting suggestion effect that appears next, the player can pay attention to the effect and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be a special result by making the setting suggestion effect appear, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect is changed by the change of (such as increase in the number of characters).

With the above configuration, by associating the setting suggestion effect with the expectation of the special result (big hit), even a player who is playing the game without worrying about the probability set value can pay attention to the effect, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect. By associating the change of with the reliability of the setting suggestion, the player can pay attention to the production and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of effect control means (effect control device 300) are displayed by displaying the same type of images (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41 in a plurality of setting suggestion effects. The production modes of the setting suggestion effects of the times are related to each other.

With the above configuration, by displaying the same type of character multiple times in the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect performed multiple times is related to each other, and by paying attention to it, the setting suggestion can be grasped. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production and to concentrate on the game.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initial) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests information (probability set value) related to the set value, and by making the setting suggestion effect appear, a variable display is provided. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the game will be a special result.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by performing the setting suggestion effect associated with the expectation of the special result (big hit).

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41.

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can be performed in a simple and easy-to-identify manner.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The second embodiment relates to the display probability setting value in the setting variable state (setting change mode) and the display method thereof.

[Work setting value, display probability setting value, effect control information]
FIG. 67 shows the work set value, the display probability setting value (setting examples 1, 2, 3, 4) and the effect control information (effect set value, effect set value) of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. It is a table which shows the correspondence. Normally, the game control device 100 holds six work set values "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" (set values), and correspondingly, the probability set values (information about the set values) are used. Therefore, it has information) "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" corresponding to the jackpot probability (and the small hit probability). However, depending on the game machine 10, the jackpot probability (and the small hit probability) corresponding to the different probability setting values is the same, and the number of display probability setting value settings may be less than six. That is, in order to prevent confusion among the people involved in the hall, even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the game machine 10 are different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability) is used, the big hit probability (and small) Make the display probability setting value associated with (hit probability) the same. The same display probability setting value means the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

In the setting example 1 of FIG. 67, 1-6 are set as display probability setting values with respect to the work setting value 0-5, and the display probability setting values are set to different values. In the setting example 2, the case where all the display probability setting values corresponding to the six work setting values are set to "1" is shown. In the setting example 3, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "0", "1", and "2" are set to "1", respectively, and the work setting values "3", "4", and "2" are set. It represents the case where the display probability setting value corresponding to "5" is set to "2". In the setting example 4, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "0" and "1" are set to "1", respectively, and the display probabilities corresponding to the work setting values "2" and "3" are set. It represents a case where the set value is set to "2" and the display probability setting value corresponding to the work setting value "4" and "5" is set to "3" respectively.

In the setting example 1, since the display probability setting value changes each time the RAM initialization switch 112 as the setting value change switch is pressed, the operator can operate the RAM initialization switch 112 by the game machine 10 (game control device 100). Can be identified as reacting.

On the other hand, in the setting example 2, since all the display probability setting values are "1" regardless of the work setting value, the display probability setting value is displayed before and after pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. There is no change in "1", and it is not possible for the operator to identify whether or not the display of the performance display device 152 (display unit) is responding to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112. Also in setting example 3, when changing the work setting value from "0" to "1", from "1" to "2", from "3" to "4", and from "4" to "5", respectively. It is not possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation. Further, also in the setting example 4, the game machine 10 (game control) is used for the operation when the work setting value is changed from "0" to "1", "2" to "3", and "4" to "5", respectively. It cannot be identified whether or not the device 100) is reacting.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, each time the work setting value is changed, the display of the display probability setting value is temporarily displayed before and after the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed. By displaying differently, it is possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of this embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, but before and after changing the work setting value (and the display probability setting value), intermediate data (intermediate) is used as the probability setting value display data. Information) is transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152.

As shown in FIG. 68, the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 in the range of "0" to "5", and the probability setting value corresponds to the work setting value. After updating the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the area by +1 (A2410), intermediate data is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (A2411), and the set probability setting value display data (intermediate data). ) Is output (A2412). In this case, the performance display device 152 has a display mode based on the intermediate data until the next probability set value display data is output (A2404). If the time for displaying the intermediate data is short and the operator cannot recognize it, the timer for delaying a predetermined time may be activated after outputting the probability set value display data (intermediate data).

As a display mode of the intermediate data, an LED for displaying each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152 (light emitting member: here, 8-segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp). ) Is turned off (FIGS. 69 and 70), all the LEDs are turned on (FIG. 71), and some specific positions of the LEDs are turned on (FIG. 72) (display probability setting value). (Different from the display mode shown).

In addition, there is also a display mode in which the display of the display probability setting value is left as it is, and at least one LED having a digit different from the digit for displaying the display probability setting value is emitted (FIG. 73).

Further, during the setting change, the display probability setting value information transmitted (displayed) by the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) to the performance display device 152 includes LEDs (segments a and b) that display the display probability setting value. , C, d, e, f, g) as well as the lighting pattern data for lighting the dot-shaped LED (segment Dp) at the lower right of the LED (Dp = 1) (additional information) Is included. Therefore, as the intermediate data, a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 including the dots are turned off (FIG. 74) and a display mode in which all the other LEDs are turned off while maintaining the lighting of the segment Dp (FIG. 75). ) Is also available.

By the way, the game control device 100 transmits information on the work set value (probability set value) after the setting change to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIGS. 6B and A1044), and the effect control device 300 receives this. (FIG. 50, B1323), it can be used as an effect setting value (effect setting value). Then, as shown in FIG. 67, the effect control device 300 includes the effect control information "1" to "6" corresponding to the work set values "0" to "5" as the effect set values. Here, the effect control device 300 can make the effect different contents based on the effect control information "1" to "6" as the effect set value. For example, in the variable effect setting process of FIG. 55, the effect content is set based on the set value. As a result, the interest in the game machine 10 can be improved by changing the effect control information each time the probability set value is changed to give variation to the effect.

[Display example of performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG. 69 has a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 are turned off.

Further, in the probability set value display data, the character "S" appears in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character "E" appears in the digit 2, and the character "T" appears in the digit 1 (of "SET"). The LED is lit so that the character appears) and the value of the current display probability setting value appears in the digit 0. Further, in the probability setting value display data, the LEDs of the digit 1, the digit 2, and the digit 3 are turned off, and the current display probability setting value value appears in the digit 0 (may be displayed in another digit). It is also possible to provide a display mode in which the LED is lit.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is set. In this case, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c of the game control device 100 (here, any value of "1" to "6" is used as the previous final work setting value. (Equivalent to the value added by 1) is read, the character "S" appears in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character "E" appears in the digit 2, the character "T" appears in the digit 1, and the digit 0 appears. In, the value "1" of one type of display probability setting value is lit and displayed, and the characters "SET1" are lit and displayed as a whole. When the variable setting state (setting change mode) is entered, the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) has a value (1 subtraction from the probability setting value) corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area. Value) may be stored.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work set value is changed (for example, from "0" to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time. Alternatively, the display mode may be such that the display probability setting value "1" is temporarily turned off while the "SET" is kept lit.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "1"). Is lit and displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (for example, from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2"). Is lit and displayed.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the character "SET1" including the display probability setting value "1" can be identified so as to be temporarily turned off and then turned on again. , When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all lights are turned off. Further, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value in the work setting value area is changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the work setting value is changed to the last updated work setting value. The corresponding probability setting value is stored in the probability setting value area.

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 or the setting example 3 of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment.

First, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 3 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “1” is considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes the display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the work setting value "1". The character "SET1" to be displayed is lit.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work set value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2") It is lit and displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (from "2" to "3"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "3" is lit and displayed. As a result, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes as the work setting value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 2 → 1 → ...). When the value of the display probability setting value is switched, the light is temporarily turned off, then the next display probability setting value is displayed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off.

Next, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 4 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “0” is considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes the display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the work setting value "0". The character "SET1" to be displayed is lit.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work set value is changed (from "0" to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value "1" is lit and displayed. To.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the changed display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "2" is lit and displayed. As a result, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. After that, although not shown, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed twice, the character "SET3" including the display probability setting value "3" corresponding to the work setting value "4" is lit and displayed.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes as the work setting value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 3 → 3 → 1 → ...・) Is changed. Further, when the value of the display probability set value is switched, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined time, and then the next display probability set value is turned on and displayed. Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are turned off.

FIG. 71 is a schematic view showing a first modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The modification described below will be described by taking Setting Example 2 as an example, but is also applicable to Setting Example 1, Setting Example 3, and Setting Example 4.

In the first modification, in the intermediate data, contrary to FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70), all the LEDs in the digit 3, the digit 2, the digit 1, and the digit 0 of the performance display device 152 are lit and displayed (at least the digits). 3. It is sufficient that any of the digits of the digit 2 and the digit 1 is lit and displayed). On the other hand, in the probability set value display data, all the LEDs are turned off in the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 of the performance display device 152 (may be a mode in which the character "SET" is displayed as described above), and in the digit 0. It has a display mode in which the LEDs constituting the display of the display probability set value are turned on.

The display mode of the display probability set value in the first modification transitions in the same manner as in FIG. 70. On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, all the LEDs of the predetermined time, digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on by the intermediate data, and then the changed display probability setting value is displayed. ..

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on. Lights up for a predetermined time.

FIG. 72 is a schematic view showing a second modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second modification shown in FIG. 72 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability setting value, and has a display mode different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change.

As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has, for example, a display mode in which only the LED (segment g) having digit 0 is turned on. In addition, in the second modification, any display mode other than the display indicating the display probability setting value can be applied. Further, other digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) may also be arbitrarily displayed by the intermediate data.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead, the LED (for example, segment g) at a specific position of digit 0 lights for a predetermined time. To do.

FIG. 73 is a schematic view showing a third modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The third modification shown in FIG. 73 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed in a digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) different from the digit (digit 0) in which the display probability setting value is displayed, and in digit 0, the display probability setting value is displayed. The display is maintained. That is, the intermediate data is different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change as a whole, but the digit for displaying the display probability setting value is the display probability setting value before the change. It is a display mode in which information is shared.

In the third modification, the game control device 100 has information on the display probability setting value (digit 0) stored in the probability setting value display data area and intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2, digits 2) related to the third modification. The digits 1) are combined and the combined data (intermediate data) is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (executed in FIG. 68, A2411).

As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 are turned on, and the composite data includes all the digits in the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1. The LED is lit, and the display mode is provided in which the LED for displaying the display probability setting value before the change is lit at digit 0. The probability set value display data has a display mode in which the probability set value is lit up in digit 0 and the digits 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are turned off, but the characters "SET" are displayed in the same manner as described above. You may try to do it.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 are lit for a predetermined time, and the lighting display of the display probability set value during that time is also maintained.

FIG. 74 is a schematic view showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display based on the display probability setting value (additional information).

In the fourth modification, the game control device 100 is in a variable setting state (first state) by turning on the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 and turning on the power to the game machine 10 in the same manner as described above. .. At this time, the game control device 100 adds dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information) to the probability set value display data. As a result, it can be indicated that the displayed display probability setting value "1." is a provisional value whose setting is being changed.

On the other hand, the intermediate data includes a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the performance display device 152 displays the "SET" of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1, and the LED that displays the probability setting value "1" for displaying the digit 0. The LED (segment Dp) displaying the dot of digit 0 is turned off for a predetermined time.

By turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting is completed (second state). At this time, the game control device 100 indicates the probability setting value display data (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) indicating the display probability setting value (including dot data (Dp = 0)) after the setting is changed (after confirmation). By setting the probability setting display data area (the LED displaying "SET" has a display mode of turning off), the display probability setting value "1" after the setting change is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display probability setting value is displayed. Turn off the lighting display of "1".

FIG. 75 is a schematic view showing a fifth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modification shown in FIG. 75 transitions in the same manner as the display mode of the fourth modification shown in FIG. 74, except for the display by the intermediate data.

On the other hand, as the intermediate data, the LED for displaying the "SET" of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 and the LED for displaying the display probability setting value of the digit 0 are turned off, and the dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information). ) Is lit by the LED (segment Dp). Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the performance display device 152 has an LED that displays the characters "SET" of the digits 3, digit 2, and digit 1, and an LED that displays the display probability setting value of the digit 0. While the light is turned off, the lighting of the LED (segment Dp) displaying the dot of digit 0 is maintained. Therefore, it can be easily identified that the display of the performance display device 152 is reacting in response to the operation and the setting is being changed.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition), and when the result of the game is a special result, In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting) capable of changing the setting value (working setting value, probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. A key switch 93) and a display unit (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information on a set value (information corresponding to a jackpot probability, a display probability set value) by causing a light emitting member (LED) to emit light. The setting changing means includes a first switch (RAM initialization switch 112) for changing the set value (working set value), and the game control means (game control device 100) is a first switch (RAM). It is possible to change the set value (working setting value) in response to the operation of the initialization switch 112) and display the information (display probability setting value) related to the changed setting value on the display unit (performance display device 152). When the setting value (working setting value) is changed, the information about the setting value before the change (display probability setting value) and the information about the changed setting value (display probability setting value) are different from the intermediate information. After displaying (intermediate data) on the display unit (performance display device 152), information (display probability setting value) regarding the changed set value is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152).

With the above configuration, intermediate data whose display mode is different from the information (display probability setting value) related to the setting value before and after the change is temporarily displayed before and after the change of the probability setting value, so that the operator can change the setting. It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation of the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) is the same regardless of the set value (working set value), and is the information corresponding to the probability value at which the game has a special result.

In the above configuration, there is no change in the information related to the set value (probability setting value for display) before and after pressing the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), but since the above intermediate data is displayed, the operation unit (RAM initialization) It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation of the conversion switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate information (intermediate data) is characterized by information that turns off all the light emitting members (LEDs) or information that turns on all the light emitting members.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify the change from the information related to the set value before the change (probability set value for display) to the information related to the set value after the change (probability set value for display).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits, and the intermediate information (intermediate data) has a digit different from the digit for displaying the information (display probability setting value) related to the set value. Is displayed.

With the above configuration, the display of the intermediate data indicates that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation, and the information on the set value (probability setting value for display) is not deleted, so the information on the set value (for display). It is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the probability set value).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has information on the set value (display probability set value) and additional information (Dp = 1) different from the information on the set value (display probability set value). , And the setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is a second switch for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (working setting value) can be changed. (Setting key switch 93) is provided, and the second switch (setting key switch 93) can change the state between a first state that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state that terminates the setting variable state. It is possible, and the game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) additional information (Dp = 1) together with information regarding the set value (display probability set value) in the first state, and the second state. At this time, the transmission (display) of the additional information is stopped (dot data (Dp = 0) is transmitted), and the intermediate information (intermediate data) includes the additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)).

With the above configuration, even if the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed during the setting change, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the setting is being changed is maintained without turning off, so that the setting is being changed. It is possible to improve the reliability of the display indicating.

In the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect related to the game is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the effect based on the set value (work set value). , The game control means (game control device 100) transmits information on the changed set values (final work set value, probability set value) to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

With the above configuration, since the effect corresponding to the changed set value can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game machine 10 by giving variation to the effect.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to accepting an input in a setting change state.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
First, the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment.

In addition to the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the first embodiment, the processes of A2601 and A2602 are added to the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a predetermined switch after performing the processes of steps A2401 to A2410 as described above in the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the first embodiment (A2601). ). The input of the predetermined switch is, for example, the input of the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a), the gate switch 34a, and the winning port switches 35a to 35n. It should be noted that the input of the predetermined switch is an interface chip (proximity I / F) such as a specific area switch 72, a large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, a remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. ) 121 may be included (see FIG. 3).

When there is an input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), and ends the probability setting change / confirmation process.

In the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command indicating that the switch input has been made to the effect control device 300. Further, the effect control device 300 lights the start port LED and the like by receiving the switch input command from the game control device 100 by the process of step B3302 of the single-shot system command process described later. Similarly, the game control device 100 may output an on / off drive signal to the batch display device 50 via the second driver 138b and the third driver 138c to light the batch display device 50.

On the other hand, if there is no input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change / confirmation process as it is.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

In addition to the one-shot command processing according to the first embodiment, the processing of B3301 and B3302 is added to the one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 performs the processes from step B1301 to step B1327 as described above in the one-shot command process according to the first embodiment, and then if the MODE unit does not represent a setting confirmation command (B1327). The result of is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE unit is within the range of the switch input command, the effect control device 300 means that the switch input command is received from the game control device 100, and determines that there is a switch input.

When the MODE unit represents a switch input command (the result of B3301 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes the switch input processing (B3302), and then ends the one-shot command processing.

In the switch input processing (B3302), the effect control device 300 lights the start port LED or displays a check item on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the switch input command. When the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command, the decorative LEDs may be sequentially turned on, or the movable accessory or the speaker 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) may be operated.

On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the switch input command (the result of B3301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 is in step B1329 or later as described above in the one-shot command processing according to the first embodiment. Proceed with the processing of.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
The details of the hall / player setting mode processing (B0011) in the above-mentioned main processing (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing according to the third embodiment. Hall / player setting mode processing activates the hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game store) can make various settings for the game machine 10, or the player setting mode in which the player can make various settings for the game machine 10. be able to.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hall setting mode is in progress (B0401). When the hole setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the hall setting mode is in progress. When in the hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is "Y"), the processing of B0406-B0416 is performed, and the operation of the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall (game store). Make various settings and adjustments based on.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B0402). When the player setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is "Y"), the processing of B0420-B0425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied when the player setting mode is not in effect (the result of B0402 is “N”) (B0403). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer or in the setting change state, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. It can be determined that it has been done. Note that waiting for customers is, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. Further, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open during the setting change state (when an error related to the front frame open error / an illegal command is received (B1316)), the effect button input process (B0010) ) When the operation of the effect button 25 is detected as an operation signal, the hall setting mode may be entered. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is "N"), the process of B0417 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is “Y”). Set the start (B0404). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B0405).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts and sets the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall, the hall volume adjustment process (B0406), the frame decoration device 18, and the frame decoration device 18. Hall LED brightness adjustment process (B0407) that adjusts and sets the LED brightness of the board decoration device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B0408) that adjusts and sets the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, and power saving. The power saving setting process (B0409) for setting the above is executed. The setting values related to the speaker volume, the LED brightness, the brightness of the display device 41, and the power saving setting are the setting values in the hall setting mode.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected by the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been performed. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting is confirmed by the factory default setting (B0412). When the effect button 25 is not operated other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting is confirmed by the factory default setting. If it is not confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B0412 is "N"), the process proceeds to B0414. When the factory default setting is confirmed (the result of B0412 is "Y"), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments with the factory default setting is executed (B0413). The factory default settings are the default settings stored in a memory such as ROM 321. Next, hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as volume and various brightness determined by B0406-B0410 and B0413 are written to the backup memory (for example, FeRAM323) (B0414).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B0416).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0417 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

The effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing start setting for starting the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode when the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is “Y”) (the result of B0417 is “Y”). B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the effect control device 300 includes a player volume adjustment process (B0420) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. The player LED brightness adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the LED brightness of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes the effect customization process described later (B0422), which customizes (individually sets) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0423). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is "Y"), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B0424). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0425). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined in B0420-B0421 may be erased and is not written to the backup memory.

In the above, the drawing update setting (update of the highlight item in the menu display, etc.) after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (B0010).

[Game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in the setting change state according to the third embodiment.

On the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of the board decoration device 46 capable of emitting light are provided in front of the start gate 34 in the normal drawing. It is provided in front of the general winning opening 35 and in front of each. The LED provided in front of the normal drawing start gate 34 is the normal drawing start gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is the general winning opening LED 35L.

When the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment receives the command for which the probability setting is being changed, the display screen of the display device 41 indicates that the setting is being changed. Display characters (B1326 setting change information setting process).

Here, when the game control device 100 is in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode), the set value is set in the processes of steps A2601 and A2602 of the probability setting change / confirmation process as described above in FIG. It functions as a control means capable of accepting inputs from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, which are inputs different from the inputs related to the change of. Then, when the game control device 100 receives the input from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command corresponding to the received input to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 in the processing of steps B3301 and B3302 of the single-shot command processing of FIG. 77, the LED of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command is received. (Normal figure start gate LED 34L and general winning opening LED 35L) are turned on or blinked.

Therefore, in the setting change state, by passing or winning the game ball through the normal drawing start gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding normal drawing starting gate LED 34L or the general winning opening LED 35L lights up or blinks. The operation can be easily checked and the maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved. As a result, for example, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be easily confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory, so that the initially defective gaming machine 10 can be detected at an early stage.

The effect control device 300 turns on or blinks the LEDs (general drawing start gate LED 34L and general winning opening LED 35L) of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command, and then turns on the other LEDs that do not correspond in order. It may be lit or blinking. According to such an aspect, the operation check of the LED of various board decoration devices 46 can be easily performed only by receiving one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, so that the maintenance of the game machine 10 can be performed. The sex can be improved.

Further, the game control device 100 corresponds to the reception of the input from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the display units 51 to 60 (LED lamp, special figure 1 display 51) of the batch display device 50. , Special figure 2 display 52, normal figure display 53, special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56, first game state display 57, second game state display The unit 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60) may be turned on or blinked as appropriate. The game control device 100 lights or blinks the display unit (any of the display units 51 to 60) of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the received input, and then all the display units (display units 51 to 60). May be turned on or blinked so that the operation of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the batch display device 50 can be checked (processing of A2602). Further, the operation check of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the batch display device 50 is not limited to the mode of all lighting or all blinking, and may be a mode of circulating lighting so that it is easy to confirm that the light is normally emitted.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and performs the switch input time processing (B3302), as shown in FIG. 79, the effect control device 300 displays a checklist on the display screen of the display device 41. It may be displayed. In the checklist, for example, a normal operation checked display such as "○" is displayed in the item of each switch corresponding to the received input.

As shown in FIG. 79, the effect control device 300 starts the checklist in response to the game control device 100 receiving the input of the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a). The normal operation checked display (“◯”) may be displayed in the items of the port 1 and the start port 2.

Further, an LED (starting winning opening LED36L) of the board decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and the LED is turned on according to the corresponding switch input command. Alternatively, it may be made to blink. Further, the effect control device 300 may operate the speaker 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) as the effect device in accordance with the corresponding switch input command. At that time, for example, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a, the effect control device 300 can make a voice notification of "Public figure start gate!", And receives the switch input command corresponding to the winning opening switches 35a to 35n. You can make a voice notification saying "General winning opening!".

Further, during the setting change, the game control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64, which is output when the front frame 12 and the like are open, and issues an error / illegal command to the effect control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the operation of the effect button 25 during transmission, the effect control device 300 says that the process of step B0403 of the hall / player setting mode process is established as described above in FIG. 78. Judgment (the result of B0403 is "Y").

Therefore, since the effect control device 300 executes the processes after step B0404, the hall can be set while the setting is changed. As described above, the game control device 100 functions as a control means that can accept the signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value when the setting is changed. Further, the effect control device 300 accepts the operation of the effect button 25 with the front frame 12 and the like open, and receives the input related to the hall setting as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state. It functions as a control means capable of changing the set value of the hall setting (for example, the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, etc.).

[Another example of a game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 80 is another example of the front view of the game board 30 whose settings are being changed according to the third embodiment.

In another example of the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 80, in the effect control device 300, in addition to the general drawing start gate LED 34L, the general winning opening LED 35L, and the starting winning opening LED 36L, the general drawing variation winning LED 37L and the first special variation The winning LED 38L and the second special variable winning LED 39L are also made to emit light. The normal variable winning LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2, second starting winning opening). The first special variable winning LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable winning device 39.

The ordinary variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39 whose settings are being changed are closed by a slide opening / closing movable member 37b and attacker-type opening / closing doors 38c and 39c, respectively.

Therefore, for example, the effect control device 300 lights or blinks the normal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, and the second special variation winning LED 39L in response to the pressing of the effect button 25 or the like during the setting change. Can be made to. It should be noted that the lighting of the general variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, the second special variation winning LED 39L, and the like may be performed in order or at the same time.

Further, the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b and the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c when there is an input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), and the normal variable winning device 37 or the first The game ball may be directly won in the 1 special variable winning device 38 and the 2nd special variable winning device 39.

Further, in the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300 can emit light of the upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL, which are the LEDs of the board decoration device 46. The upper effect unit LED 40cL is an LED provided in the upper effect unit 40c. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade portion of the sword possessed by the character of the side effect unit 40d. The effect control device 300 lights or blinks the upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL, for example, in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed while the setting is being changed. The upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL may be turned on in order or at the same time.

In this way, by emitting the LED of the accessory (decorative member) in addition to the LED of the winning opening and the winning device, the operation check of the LED of the accessory (decorative member) can be easily performed. Maintainability can be improved. It should be noted that the maintainability may be further improved by moving a movable accessory or the like as a production device at the time of light emission so that it can be confirmed whether the motor of the movable accessory or the like moves normally.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a lamp display device 80 (lamp display units 1 to 6 (LEDs)) provided on the lower right side of the game area 32 in response to pressing the effect button 25 or the like while changing the setting. )) May be combined to make it emit light.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
In the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) for variablely displaying the identification information (identification information, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, this special figure) is When a special result (big hit result) is obtained, a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player can be generated. The game machine 10 includes a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) that controls the game, and a setting changing means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) that can change the setting value related to the game condition. , Equipped with. The control means can accept an input different from the input related to the change of the set value when the set value can be changed by the setting change means in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode).

According to such a game machine 10, when the setting value can be changed in the setting change state, the control means can accept the input related to the management and maintenance of the game machine 10 such as the hall setting and the operation check. It is possible to improve the manageability and maintainability of the game machine 10.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) is a predetermined input (front frame open) as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state. When the signal from the detection switch 64 and the signal from the effect button 25 are received, it is possible to change the set value as well as the set value (set value in the hall setting) different from the set value during the setting change state.

According to such a game machine 10, the setting value of the hall setting can be changed as a setting value different from the setting value related to the game condition when the setting is changed, so that the person in charge of the game hall (game store) It is possible to improve the maintainability by the above. In addition, since the setting change state is usually changed by the operation of the person in charge of the game hall (game store), the setting value of the hall setting can be changed in the setting change state, so that the game hall can be changed. It is possible to prevent the setting value of the hall setting from being unnecessarily changed by a person who is not responsible for.

Further, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment is a batch display device in addition to a light emitting device capable of emitting light (LEDs of the board decoration device 46 (particularly LEDs in front of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening)). Display units 51 to 60) of 50, a predetermined area provided in the game area 32 where the game ball can enter or pass, and a detection means capable of detecting the entry or passage of the game ball into the predetermined area. Be prepared. When the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) receives an input from the detection means as different inputs, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) causes the light emitting device to emit light.

According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to easily check the operation of various detection means that can normally detect the game ball and that the various light emitting devices emit light normally when the setting is changed. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (LEDs and the like of the board decoration device 46, etc.) are provided. The control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) can sequentially change the display of the plurality of light emitting devices to a predetermined display mode (for example, light emission) during the setting change state.

According to such a game machine 10, for example, the effect control device 300 simply receives one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, and various light emitting devices (board decoration device 46) are in the setting change state. Since the operation check of the LED and the effect device) can be easily performed, the maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved.

Further, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided in a game area 32 with a production device (display device 41, board decoration device 46, lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying a display related to the effect, and a game ball is provided. Predetermined areas where balls can be entered or passed (general drawing start gate 34, each general winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), second starting winning opening (second starting) of the normal variable winning device 37 (Winning area), etc.) and detection means (gate switch 34a, winning port switches 35a to 35n, starting port switch, etc.) capable of detecting the entry or passage of a game ball into a predetermined area. When the control means receives an input from the detection means as a different input, the display of the effect device can be changed to a predetermined display mode (LED light emission, display of normal operation checked display on the checklist).

According to such a game machine 10, for example, when the setting is changed, the game ball is passed or entered into the normal drawing start gate 34, each general winning opening 35, or the like as a predetermined area. Since the start gate LED 34L and the general winning opening LED 35L can be lit or blinked, and a checklist for passing or entering a ball can be displayed on the display device 41, it is possible to easily check the operation and improve the maintainability of the game machine 10. Can be done. As a result, for example, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be easily confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory, so that the initially defective gaming machine 10 can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment has an upper effect of a speaker 19 and a board effect device 44 (movable accessories, etc.) in addition to the LEDs of the effect device (display device 41 and board decoration device 46) capable of performing the effect. A unit 40c, a side effect unit 40d, etc.) are provided. The control means (effect control device 300) can operate the effect device when the setting is changed.

According to such a game machine 10, for example, as a directing device, in addition to emitting light from the LED of the board decoration device 46, a sound is notified from the speaker 19, and a movable accessory or the like is movable as a directing device at the time of light emission. By doing so, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LED of the board effect device 44 and the operation of the motors such as the speaker 19 and the movable accessory when the setting is changed, and the maintainability of the game machine 10 is further improved. Can be made to.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the operation of the gaming machine 10 when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the power is restored.

[Timing chart in the special game state of normal operation]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output and the like in the special gaming state of normal operation will be described in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of signal output or the like in a special gaming state of normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 81, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs at time t1, external information is displayed in the special figure 1 display processing (FIG. 37) or the special figure 2 display processing (FIG. 38). As signals related to the start of the jackpot (special game state) saved in the output data area, for example, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are output. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer). Specifically, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are started to be output when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes the jackpot result (special result). The power of the game machine 10 is kept on, and the security signal is off.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the big hit 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area by the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (A5714) of the special figure 1 display process (FIG. 37), or If the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area by the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (A5816) of the special figure 2 display process (FIG. 38). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the big hit 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 display processing (FIG. 37), or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. In the case of, the data is saved in the external information output data area in step A5811 of the process during display of special figure 2 (FIG. 38).

When the first jackpot ends at time t2, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. Specifically, the output of the jackpot 1 signal means that the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area by the end of the special game state, that is, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 40 and 41) after the round game. Then it turns off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, the time is shortened (general electric support state, specific game state) or probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal remains on. Will be done.

Specifically, when the off data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot by the special figure 1 variable display game, the jackpot 1 signal is turned off, so that step A6112 of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (FIG. 40) Is saved in the external information output data area. Further, when the off data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot by the special figure 2 variable display game, the jackpot 1 signal is turned off, so that the external information is obtained in step A6212 of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (FIG. 41). Saved in the output data area.

When the jackpot 2 signal is in the time saving state after the jackpot ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the jackpot end setting process 2 and the output (on state) continues. If the jackpot 2 signal is in a probabilistic state after the jackpot ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6801 of the jackpot end setting process 3 and the output (on state) continues.

Subsequently, at time t3, when a big hit occurs again, that is, when a second big hit occurs, the output of one big hit signal is turned on.

Then, at time t4, when the second big hit is completed, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Further, the second big hit corresponds to a normal big hit symbol (for example, a 10R normal big hit symbol), and the time reduction determination data is data with a time reduction, and there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is "N". ”) (No V prize), the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6103). Therefore, after the end of the second big hit, the time is shortened (Public electricity support state).

After that, at time t5, when the variation display game in the time saving state reaches, for example, 100 times after the end of the second big hit, the number of remaining games in the time saving state (the number of time saving fluctuations) becomes 0 and the time saving state ends. To do. At that time, the output of the jackpot 2 signals is turned off by saving the off data of the jackpot 2 signals in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time reduction variation number update process. Further, when a game including a special game state or the like is performed in the normal operation in this way, the power supply of the game machine 10 is maintained in the on state, and the security signal remains off.

In addition, unlike the above, when the probability change state is reached after the end of the second big hit, the probability change state ends when the fall lottery is won in the fall lottery process (FIG. 20), and at that time, the output of the big hit 2 signal is output. , The off data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area (A3704), so that it is turned off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after a power failure in a special game state]
With reference to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the normal recovery occurs by power recovery will be described. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment and normal recovery is performed by power recovery. In the following FIGS. 82 to 86, contents that overlap with the contents described in FIGS. 81 and the like will be omitted as appropriate.

At time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, as in FIG. 81 described above, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. In addition, the security signal is maintained in the off state.

When a power failure occurs during the first big hit (for example, during a round game) at time t11, the power of the game machine 10 is turned off and the big hit game is interrupted, as shown in FIG. 82. Further, as the power of the game machine 10 is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

When the power is restored (power failure recovery) and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time t12, the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process. The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved (stored) in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and the game control device 100 has the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal at the time of power recovery. Save data (stored information) about the output state, that is, the jackpot state is held (maintained) inside. Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal that were on before the power failure are turned on, and the first jackpot game is restarted.

When the first jackpot ends at time t13, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (general electric support state) or a probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal is maintained in the on state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t14 to time t16 is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above in FIG. 81.

When a power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probability change state, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are similarly turned off. Then, when the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability change state is restarted. can do.

[Timing chart when a memory error occurs after a power failure in a special game state]
In the fourth embodiment with reference to FIG. 83, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and a memory abnormality occurs in the power recovery will be described. FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs in power recovery.

At time t1, the first big hit (special game state) occurs as in FIG. 81 described above, and after the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are output, a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t21. When it occurs, the power of the game machine 10 is turned off and the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t22, when the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, if a memory abnormality of the RAM (here, RAM 111c) occurs, the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is set in the main process (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the on-data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal (A1026). Further, while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) as save data (stored information) in the RAM at the time of power failure is read by the power failure recovery process at the time of power recovery. Therefore, at the time of normal restoration, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal can be output as shown by the broken line in FIG. However, since the RAM memory abnormality has occurred, the game control device 100 turns on the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83, while holding the jackpot 1 signal as shown by the broken line in FIG. 83. And the jackpot 2 signal is not output.

After that, at time t23, when the power is turned off once and then turned on, it is determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on) (the result of A1021 is). “Y”), the state shifts to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), the probability setting value is cleared due to a RAM error (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A1036 is "Y") and the setting change state ends, 0 clear (RAM clear) of the RAM area other than the probability set value is performed (A1042), and initialization is performed. (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Further, the memory abnormality of the game machine 10 is resolved. On the other hand, the jackpot state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol is also out of alignment.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the second big hit, a time saving state, or a probability change state, a memory abnormality occurs in the same manner, RAM is cleared and initialized, and the game machine 10 is in the normal game state. Become.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting confirmation state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored to normal, and the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered will be described. To do. FIG. 84 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the state shifts to the setting confirmation state.

Similar to FIG. 81 described above at time t1, when the first big hit occurs and one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output, and then a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t31, the game machine 10 When the power is turned off, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are also turned off.

At time t32, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned on (RAM initialization switch 112 is off), the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting checking flag is set. (A1032), the game machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be confirmed (A1305).

When the setting confirmation state is entered at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83 (A2406).

As described above in FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the RAM during a power failure (A1057, A1058), and is also shown by a broken line in FIG. 84 when the power is restored. As described above, save data regarding the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), and when the power failure recovery process is performed (A1045), the security signal is turned off.

In addition, the output status of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) as save data (stored information) in the RAM at the time of a power failure is read by the power failure recovery process and turned on after the setting confirmation state is completed. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first big hit game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the jackpot game (special game) during normal operation without a power failure is digested over the same time.

When the first jackpot ends at time t34, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (general electric support state) or a probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal is maintained in the on state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t35 to time t36 is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above in FIG. 81.

If a power failure occurs during the second big hit, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and the power is restored to the setting confirmation state, when the setting confirmation state ends, the game is played by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process. The machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure, and can resume the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probability change state.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, a signal output or the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored to normal, and the state changes to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The timing of is explained. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the state shifts to the setting change state.

Similar to FIG. 81 described above at time t1, when the first big hit occurs and one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output, and then a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t41, the game machine 10 When the power is turned off, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are also turned off.

At time t42, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (on), the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting is changed. The middle flag is set (A1029), and the game machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (A1305).

When the setting change state is entered at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 85 (A2406).

As described above in FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the RAM during a power failure (A1057, A1058), and is also shown by a broken line in FIG. 85 when the power is restored. As described above, save data regarding the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t43, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"). ), 0 clear (RAM clear) of the RAM area other than the probability set value is performed (A1042), and it is initialized (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, when the setting change state is completed, the game machine 10 is normally restored, but the jackpot state is reset by clearing the RAM, and the game machine 10 is in the normal game state, and the stop symbol is also out of the symbol.

In addition, even if a power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probability change state, the RAM is cleared and initialized when the setting change state is completed, and the game machine 10 is in the normal game state. It becomes.

[Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored normally by power recovery, and the power is turned off after shifting to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The timing of signal output and the like when the signal is output will be described. FIG. 86 shows an example of the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal by power recovery, the setting is changed, and then the power is turned off. It is a timing chart which shows.

The signal output when a power failure occurs from the occurrence of the first big hit from time t1 to time t52 and the power is restored in the setting changed state is the same as the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above in FIG. 85. At time t52, when shifting to the setting change state, the probability setting changing flag is set as in the case of time t42 in FIG. 85 (A1029).

After that, at time t53, when the power is turned off (or when the power failure occurs again) in the setting change state, the output of the security signal is turned off. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 85, the save data relating to the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is retained as in the broken line up to FIG. 84. Further, since the save data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the broken lines of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal when the power is turned off are turned off. The flag for changing the probability setting remains set (the result of A1037 is "Y", A1057, A1058).

At time t54, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on (the result of A1021 is “N”) and the power is turned on, the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). The result is "Y"), and the on-data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are held in the RAM as save data in the output state (on state) as shown by the broken line in FIG. 86, but are not output. Further, since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) cannot be executed while waiting and waiting by repeating the processes of steps A1025 and A1026, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in a setting change state) from being reflected in the game. After that, by clearing the RAM at the same time as the time t23 in FIG. 83 (A1042), the normal recovery can be performed, and at that time, the jackpot state is reset.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
The game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, the special figure variable display game, the variable display game) becomes a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating (big hit game state) is provided. The game machine 10 includes a holding storage means (RAM of the game control device 100) that stores information related to the game and can store and hold the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can output a signal (one jackpot signal) when a special gaming state occurs, and holds it during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. When an abnormality in the information recorded in the storage means is detected, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and a signal (one jackpot signal) is not output.

According to such a game machine 10, when an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. Does not output the signal (1 jackpot signal) that is output when the special gaming state occurs, but outputs the security signal, so that it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is being fraudulent when the power is restored. .. By notifying fraud, the person in charge of the amusement park (game store) can take measures against fraud.

Further, the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) related to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can output a signal (big hit 1 signal) when a special game state (big hit game state) occurs, and a set value after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state. Outputs a security signal to notify an abnormality during the restart process when a power failure occurs and the power is restored in the changeable setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), and a signal (1 jackpot signal) Is not output.

According to such a game machine 10, a signal (one jackpot signal) output when a special game state occurs is not output during the restart process when a power failure occurs and the power is restored in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify the game machine that an unexpected process is being performed in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game hall (game store) can take a response to the fact that an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) is performed on the game machine.

Further, the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, the special figure variation display game, the variation display game) becomes a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (big hit game state) and a specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) is provided. The game machine 10 includes a holding storage means (RAM of the game control device 100) that stores information related to the game and can store and hold the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can start outputting a signal (two jackpot signals) when the special gaming state occurs, and can output the signal until the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends, and can output the special gaming state or the specific gaming state. If an abnormality in the information recorded in the retention storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the state, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is sent. Output and do not output signals (2 jackpot signals).

According to such a game machine 10, after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of a special game state or a specific game state, an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored. When it is detected, the signal (2 jackpot signals) that is output when the special game state occurs is not output, but the security signal is output. Therefore, when the power is restored, the game machine is fraudulent. It can be notified that. By notifying fraud, the person in charge of the amusement park (game store) can take measures against fraud.

Further, the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) related to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can start outputting signals (big hit 2 signals) when a special game state (big hit game state) occurs, and a specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) after the special game state. The signal can be output until the end of, and after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state or the specific game state, the power failure occurs in the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed. During the restart process when the power is restored, a security signal for notifying an abnormality is output, and no signal (2 jackpot signals) is output.

According to such a game machine 10, the signal (2 jackpot signals) output when the special game state occurs is not output during the restart process when the power is restored due to a power failure in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify the game machine that an unexpected process is being performed in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game hall (game store) can take a response to the fact that an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) is performed on the game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

10 Game machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 Setting key switch 100 Game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 Performance display device 200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

A production control means capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner is provided, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player can be generated. In a game machine
Equipped with a setting change means that can change the setting value according to the setting related to the game
The effect control means
It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that includes a plurality of elements and suggests information about the set value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.
During the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the first element of the setting suggestion effect suggests information about the set value, and the second element of the setting suggestion effect causes the stop result of the variable display game being executed. A game machine characterized in that it can notify the degree of expectation that will be a special result. The effect control means
Oite once the variable display games, the gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the setting suggested presentation including the first element and the second element is a plurality of times feasible.